IPAM-4800/4824

48/24-Port IP DSLAM
User’s Manual

First Edition (September 2004)

Version 1.0

RECYCLABLE
 TABLE OF CONTENTS
____________________

List of Figures .................................................................................... iii

List of Tables...................................................................................... iii

About This Manual.............................................................................. 3

What’s the difference between ATM based DSLAM and IP based

DSLAM? ............................................................................................... 3

1 Introduction................................................................................... 3
1.1 General.........................................................................................................3

1.2 IPAM-4800/4824 Overview ..........................................................................3

1.3 IPAM-4800/4824 Application .......................................................................3

1.4 IPAM-4800/4824 Features ...........................................................................3

1.4.1 Cost Saving Solution for SMB........................................................................... 3
1.4.2 Excellent Management with Security ................................................................ 3
1.4.3 Advanced Function for Broadband Service Offering......................................... 3

1.5 IPAM-4800/4824 Specifications..................................................................3

2 Getting Started .............................................................................. 3

2.1 General.........................................................................................................3

2.2 Unpacking your IPAM-4800/4824 ...............................................................3

2.3 Hardware Installation ..................................................................................3

2.3.1 Safety Instruction .............................................................................................. 3
2.3.2 IPAM-4800/4824 Rear Panel Connection ......................................................... 3
2.3.3 IPAM-4800/4824 Front Panel Connection ........................................................ 3

2.4 Ways of Management Connection .............................................................3

2.4.1 EMS(Element Management System)................................................................ 3
2.4.2 Command Line Interface (CLI).......................................................................... 3
2.4.3 Telnet Client ...................................................................................................... 3

3 EMS Configuration ....................................................................... 3

3.1 EMS Functions ............................................................................................3
3.1.1 Installation......................................................................................................... 3
3.1.2 Un-installation of EMS ...................................................................................... 3
3.1.3 Starting the System........................................................................................... 3
3.1.4 Logging into the System ................................................................................... 3
3.1.5 Terminating the System .................................................................................... 3
3.1.6 Logging out the Current Session ...................................................................... 3
3.2 Windows Arrangement ...............................................................................3
3.2.1 Cascade............................................................................................................ 3
3.2.2 Next Window..................................................................................................... 3
3.2.3 Previous Window .............................................................................................. 3
3.2.4 Arrange Icons ................................................................................................... 3

3.3 Help ..............................................................................................................3

3.4 Tools Menu Introduction.............................................................................3

3.4.1 Environmental Options...................................................................................... 3
3.4.2 Territory manager configuration ........................................................................ 3
3.4.3 Agent Manager Configuration ........................................................................... 3
3.4.4 Telnet ................................................................................................................ 3
3.4.5 Ping................................................................................................................... 3
3.4.6 User Manager window ...................................................................................... 3

4 Manage the IPAM-4800/4824........................................................ 3

4.1 Activate Function Management Windows.................................................3
4.1.1 Function management Windows....................................................................... 3

4.2 Default Setting.............................................................................................3

4.3 System Information.....................................................................................3

4.4 Current Event ..............................................................................................3

4.5 System .........................................................................................................3

4.5.1 Commit and Reboot .......................................................................................... 3

4.6 Configuration...............................................................................................3
4.6.1 VLAN Configuration .......................................................................................... 3
4.6.2 Ethernet Configuration ...................................................................................... 3
4.6.3 Static Multicast Configuration............................................................................ 3

4.7 DSL ...............................................................................................................3

4.7.1 Profile Configuration ......................................................................................... 3
4.7.2 Port Configuration ............................................................................................. 3

4.8 DSL Performance Management .................................................................3

4.8.1 Physical Layer Info............................................................................................ 3
4.8.2 Channel Layer Info............................................................................................ 3
4.8.3 Physical Layer PM ............................................................................................ 3
4.8.4 Channel Layer PM ............................................................................................ 3

5 System Administration with CLI.................................................. 3

5.1 Notation Conventions .................................................................................3

5.2 Command Structure....................................................................................3

iii
5.3 Glossary of Terms and Acronyms .............................................................3

5.4 CLI Command Brief Description ................................................................3

5.4.1 Calling Commands............................................................................................ 3

5.5 Commands Group Description ..................................................................3

5.5.1 Interface Commands......................................................................................... 3
5.5.2 ATM Interface Commands ................................................................................ 3
5.5.3 ATM VC Commands ......................................................................................... 3
5.5.4 AAL5 VC Statistics Commands......................................................................... 3
5.5.5 ATM VC Statistics Commands .......................................................................... 3
5.5.6 Ethernet Commands ......................................................................................... 3
5.5.7 EOA Commands ............................................................................................... 3
5.5.8 GVRP Port Info Commands.............................................................................. 3
5.5.9 VLAN Static Commands ................................................................................... 3
5.5.10 Vlan curr info Commands ................................................................................. 3
5.5.11 VLAN Port Stats Commands............................................................................. 3
5.5.12 Transparent Bridging Table Commands............................................................ 3
5.5.13 IP Route Table Commands ............................................................................... 3
5.5.14 IP Net to Media Table Commands .................................................................... 3
5.5.15 Bridge Mode Commands .................................................................................. 3
5.5.16 DHCP Client Commands .................................................................................. 3
5.5.17 Multicast Forwarding Table Commands............................................................ 3
5.5.18 Bridge Static Unicast Commands ..................................................................... 3
5.5.19 Bridge Static Multicast Commands ................................................................... 3
5.5.20 Bridge mcast fwdunreg commands................................................................... 3
5.5.21 ridge tbg traps Commands................................................................................ 3
5.5.22 Bridge Port Table Commands ........................................................................... 3
5.5.23 Bridge Port Stats Table Commands .................................................................. 3
5.5.24 Bridge Port Cap Commands ............................................................................. 3
5.5.25 Ping Commands ............................................................................................... 3
5.5.26 ADSL Line Profile Commands .......................................................................... 3
5.5.27 ADSL Line Intf Commands ............................................................................... 3
5.5.28 DSL System Commands................................................................................... 3
5.5.29 ADSL Cap Commands...................................................................................... 3
5.5.30 ADSL Alarm Profile Commands ........................................................................ 3
5.5.31 ADSL ATUR Trapsext Commands .................................................................... 3
5.5.32 ADSL ATUC Trapsext Commands .................................................................... 3
5.5.33 ADSL Alarm Profilext Commands ..................................................................... 3
5.5.34 ADSL ATUC Physical Commands..................................................................... 3
5.5.35 ADSL ATUC Channel Commands..................................................................... 3
5.5.36 ADSL ATUC Channel Interval Commands........................................................ 3
5.5.37 ADSL ATUC Trap Commands........................................................................... 3
5.5.38 ADSL ATUC Perf Commands ........................................................................... 3
5.5.39 ADSL ATUC Interval Commands ...................................................................... 3
5.5.40 ADSL ATUR Physical Commands..................................................................... 3
5.5.41 ADSL ATUR Channel Commands..................................................................... 3
5.5.42 ADSL ATUR Trap Commands........................................................................... 3
5.5.43 ADSL ATUR Perf Commands ........................................................................... 3
5.5.44 ADSL ATUR Interval Commands ...................................................................... 3
5.5.45 ADSL ATUR Chanperf Commands ................................................................... 3
5.5.46 ADSL ATUR Chanintrvl Commands.................................................................. 3

iv
 5.5.47 System Configuration Save And Restore Commands ...................................... 3
5.5.48 System Control Table Commands .................................................................... 3
5.5.49 System Info Commands.................................................................................... 3
5.5.50 System manuf info Commands......................................................................... 3
5.5.51 System reboot info command ........................................................................... 3
5.5.52 System Size Commands................................................................................... 3
5.5.53 System Stats Commands.................................................................................. 3
5.5.54 System Traps Commands................................................................................. 3
5.5.55 ACL Global Macentry Commands .................................................................... 3
5.5.56 ACL Port Macentry Commands ........................................................................ 3
5.5.57 SNTP Cfg Commands ...................................................................................... 3
5.5.58 SNTP Stats Commands .................................................................................... 3
5.5.59 SNTP servaddr Commands .............................................................................. 3
5.5.60 SNMP Comm Commands................................................................................. 3
5.5.61 SNMP Host Commands.................................................................................... 3
5.5.62 SNMP Stats Commands ................................................................................... 3
5.5.63 SNMP Traphost Commands ............................................................................. 3
5.5.64 File Commands................................................................................................. 3
5.5.65 Other Commands.............................................................................................. 3

6 Examples of Frequently Used CLI............................................... 3

6.1 IPAM-4800/4824 Default Settings ...............................................................3

6.2 Modify the system IP ..................................................................................3

6.3 Set System Time .........................................................................................3

6.4 VLAN ............................................................................................................3

6.5 Enable the Stacking ....................................................................................3

6.6 Modify the Downstram/ Upstream Rate.....................................................3

6.7 Enable SNMP function ................................................................................3

6.8 LACP aggr....................................................................................................3

6.9 Multicast.......................................................................................................3

6.10 ACL...............................................................................................................3

6.11 IP Filter .........................................................................................................3

6.12 DHCP filter ...................................................................................................3

6.13 FTP filter.......................................................................................................3

6.14 HTTP filter ....................................................................................................3

Appendix-A: Pin Assignment............................................................. 3

v
vi
List of Figures
Figure 0-1 PPPoE application in Traditional ATM-based ADSL Network.......................... 3
Figure 0-2 PPPoE application in IPAM-4800/4824 with Ethernet-All-The-Way Network .. 3
Figure 1-1 IPAM-4800 Front View .................................................................................... 3
Figure 1-2 IPAM-4824 Front View .................................................................................... 3
Figure 1-3 IPAM-4800 Rear View ..................................................................................... 3
Figure 1-4 IPAM-4824 Rear View ..................................................................................... 3
Figure 1-5 IPAM-4800/4824 LED Identification ................................................................ 3
Figure 2-1 IPAM-4800/4824 Rear Panel Connection ....................................................... 3
Figure 2-2 IPAM-4800/4824 Front Panel Connections ..................................................... 3

vii
List of Tables
Table 1-1 IPAM-4800/4824 LED Description .................................................................... 3
Table 3-1 Agent Management Field Definition.................................................................. 3
Table 3-2 User Manager Field Definition .......................................................................... 3
Table 3-3 Register-Security Field Definition ..................................................................... 3
Table 4-1 Sysinfo field definition ....................................................................................... 3
Table 4-2 Outstanding Event Window Field Definitions .................................................... 3
Table 4-3 Closed Event Window Field Definition.............................................................. 3
Table 4-4 VLAN Configuration Field Definitions ............................................................... 3
Table 4-5 Ethernet Configuration Field Definitions ........................................................... 3
Table 4-6 VLAN Configuration Field Definitions ............................................................... 3
Table 4-7 Line Profile Field Definitions ............................................................................. 3
Table 4-8 Alarm Profile Field Definitions........................................................................... 3
Table 4-9 Port Configuration Field Definitions .................................................................. 3
Table 4-10 Physical Layer Info Field Definitions............................................................... 3
Table 4-11 Channel Layer Information Field Definitions ................................................... 3
Table 4-12 Current Phy-Layer PM Information Field Definitions ...................................... 3
Table 4-13 Current Channel-Layer PM Information Field Definitions ............................... 3
Table 4-1 CLI Command - Action List ............................................................................... 3
Table A-1 IPAM-4800/4824 CID port pin assignment.................................................... 3
Table A-2 RS-232 DB9 pin assignment (for PC to CID port connection) ...................... 3
Table A-3 IPAM-4800/4824 management port pin assignment ..................................... 3
Table A-4 Uplink and downlink port (Xn) pin assignment.............................................. 3
Table A-5 24 ports ADSL LINE Connector pin assignment ........................................... 3
Table A-6 24 ports POTS splitter PHONE Connector pin assignment ........................ 3
 C-COM IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM

About This Manual

Audience
This book is intended for anyone who installs, manages, and configures
the IPAM-4800/4824 via CID/RS-232 or Telnet/Ethernet CLI command
interface. The IPAM-4800/4824 is a standalone IP-based DSLAM which
can concentrate and manage 48/24 ADSL ports.

You must have a basic understanding of ADSL and Layer 2 concentrator

related technologies, be knowledgeable about data communications, and
familiar with VT-100 terminal emulation tools.

Purpose
This book describes how to install, manage, and configure the
IPAM-4800/4824 system via CLI command Line interface through
CID/RS-232 interface or Telnet/Ethernet interface.

Organization
This book provides task-based instructions for installing and using the CLI
interface to configure and administrate the IPAM-4800/4824 System. The
manual is organized as follows:

Chapter Title & Description

1 Introduction
Provides an overview of IPAM-4800/4824 System, including features,
fucntions, and applications of the IPAM-4800/4824.
2 Getting Started
Presents platform and system requirements as well as procedures
and instructions for installing the IPAM-4800/4824.
3 EMS Configuration
Describes how to build up the EMS environment.
4 Manage the IPAM-4800/4824
Describes how to manage a specified IPAM-4800/4824 via EMS.
5 System Administration with CLI
Provides all the instructions and procedures necessary for you to
Administer your IPAM-4800/4824 with CLI interface.
6 Frequently Used CLI Examples
help users to be familiar with frequently used CLI commands
Appendix A Describes the pin assignment for IPAM-4800/4824

1
 C-COM IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM

Document Conventions
Commands descriptions use these conventions:

[ ] Elements in square brackets are optional

<> Essential values
<x|y|z> Alternative keywords are grouped in < > and separated by
vertical bars
Others

Note Means reader take note. Notes contain helpful suggestions.

2
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM

What’s the difference between ATM based

DSLAM and IP based DSLAM?
Fig 0-1 & Fig 0-2 display the differences between traditional ATM-based
DSLAM and IPAM-4800/4824 in PPPoE application sample.

Figure 0-1 PPPoE application in Traditional ATM-based ADSL

Network
As Fig 0-1 displays, in traditional ATM-based ADSL network, the user
application information is encapsulated by ADSL CPE into ATM cells in
pre-defined VC(Virtual Channel, PVC), and then upstream the ATM cells
to DSLAM via ADSL link. (In this example, the user information (PPPoE
encapsulated) is encapsulated by ATU-R using RFC-1483 Bridge-mode
encapsulation format.)

All the ATM cells belong to the specified VC is concentrated by the DSLAM,
and switched in the ATM network clouds, to the defined destination (ISPs
or Offices), at there the ATM cells and PPPoE frames is resolved by the
Broadband Access Server, and the user application information is
serviced.

3
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM

Figure 0-2 PPPoE application in IPAM-4800/4824 with Ethernet-All-The-Way

Network
In addition to traditional ATM-based ADSL network. As Fig 0-2 displays,
the user application information is still encapsulated by ADSL CPE into
ATM cells in pre-defined VC (Virtual Channel, PVC), and then upstream
the ATM cells to DSLAM via ADSL link.

In the IPAM-4800/4824, all the ATM cells belong to the specified VC are
decapsulated back to the original PPPoE encapsulated Ethernet packet (if
VLAN-mode of the specified ADSL port is disabled), or mapped to the
pre-defined Ethernet-VLAN packets (if VLAN-mode of the specified ADSL
port is enabled). IPAM-4800/4824 concentrates all Ethernet-with/without
VLAN-tag packets from 48/24 ports’ ADSL and uplinks to ISP’s
Ethernet-All-The-Way network. The PPPoE frames will be resolved at
Broadband Access Server (BAS), and the user application information was
serviced.

The IPAM-4800/4824 supports ADSL CPE Bridge-mode. For future FW

upgrade, the IPAM-4800/4824 can act as BRAS to process user
application information directly.

IPAM-4800/4824 provides Ethernet-with/without VLAN tag to ATM-PVC

mapping feature for the ISP to isolate user’s data with security and to
provide lots of service enhancement capabilities. IPAM-4800/4824

4
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM

supports 8 ATM PVC links for each ADSL/ADSL2/2+ CPE.

5
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM

1
1.1 General
Introduction

This chapter will help you understand the function and application of your
IPAM-4800/4824. It covers

„ IPAM-4800/4824 Overview
This section describes the overview of your IPAM-4800/4824. The
IPAM-4800/4824 is cost effective solution for you to complete immediate
implementation of multiple of services in private and public networks.

„ IPAM-4800/4824 Application
IPAM-4800/4824 can be applied in MTU/MDU/MHU and Ethernet-all-the-way
application.

„ IPAM-4800/4824 Features
This section describes the features of IPAM-4800/4824 and its specification.

6
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM

1.2 IPAM-4800/4824 Overview

Using the latest xDSL technology, IPAM-4800 series offers Internet service
providers a very cost-effective solution for immediate implementation of
multiple services in private and public networks. Currently, there are 2 models
unveiled, IPAM-4800 and IPAM-4824. IPAM-4800, equipped with 48 ports, is
a high-port-density design, providing service to maximun 48 xDSL lines;
meanwhile, to satisfy the application of fewer subscribers, IPAM-4824,
equipped with 24 ports, is also provided.

IPAM-4800/4824 it acts as a standalone IP-based DSLAM, which can

concentrate and manage up to 48/24 ADSL/ADSL2/2+ lines. User can use
local RS-232 CID and/or remote TELNET/SNMP to manage the
IPAM-4800/4824 directly.

Since the ATM backbone coverage is not so general in the real broadband
network environment. Instead of traditional DSLAM system provides ATM
uplink interface, the IPAM-4800/4824 concentrates 48/24 ports of the ATM
over ADSL traffic which is encapsulated by ADSL CPEs, and maps each
user’s ata encapsulated in ATM-PVC to Ethernet-with/without VLAN-tag
packet (depends on the VLAN was enabled or not for the specified ATM ports),
and then uplink to Telco or ISP directly, User can enable VLAN-PVC mapping
capability for each ADSL/ADSL2/2+ port independently. The IPAM-4800/4824
acts as bridge for the ADSL/ADSL2/2+ ports without enabling the VLAN-PVC
mapping feature. IPAM-4800/4824 provides both Ethernet-VLAN and
non-VLAN to ATM-PVC mapping feature and bridge mode for the ISP to
isolate user’s data with security and to provide lots of service enhancement
capabilities. IPAM-4800/4824 supports 8 ATM PVC links for each
ADSL/ADSL2/2+ CPE. Following figures are front view of IPAM-4800 and
IPAM-4824.

Figure 1-1 IPAM-4800 Front View

7
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM

Figure 1-2 IPAM-4824 Front View

As Fig 1-1 and 1-2 display, in the front view of IPAM-4800/4824, there are
several LEDs to indicate current system and link status and one replaceable
uplink/downlink module with three Giga TX/LX Ethernet interfaces for uplink,
downlink, and local management.

Through the uplink Ethernet, the IPAM-4800/4824 can be stacked and

managed via SNMP as one entity.

As Fig 1-3 and 1-4 displays, in the rear-panel, there is one power adaptor,
both -42V ~ -56V DC or 90V ~ 240V AC power module can be selected. For
IPAM-4800/4824, There are two sets of DSL & POTS 50-pin Centronic
connectors. Each set provides 24-port with built-in POTS-splitter
ADSL/ADSL2/2+ module, totally 48 ADSL/ADSL2/2+ CPE users can be
supported in one IPAM-4800/4824.

AC power
module 24-port ADSL
module with built-in
POTS splitter

Figure 1-3 IPAM-4800 Rear View

AC power Figure 1-4 IPAM-4824 Rear View

module 24-port ADSL
module with
built-in POTS

Fig 1-5 displays the LED identification of IPAM-4800/4824, and Table-1

describes its color definition and status description.

8
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM

Figure 1-5 IPAM-4800/4824 LED Identification

Table 1-1 IPAM-4800/4824 LED Description

<LED ID> Color Description
POWER Green Lit when power on.
MAINT Yellow Lit when maintance commands were issued.
ALARM Red Lit when MJ/MN events happen.
MASTER Green Lit when system was acted as management master
for stacking application (future feature).
100/Act Green/ Blink when information is transmitted through
Blinking 100Mbps MGNT Ethernet interface.
1000/ACT Green/ Blink when information is transmitted through 1000
Blinking Mbps uplink Ethernet interface.
GIGA Green/ Blink when information is transmitted through
Blinking 1000FX uplink Ethernet interface.
ACT Green/ Giga uplink is activated.
Blinking
ADSL1 – Green/ Lit Solid Green when ADSL link is in active state;
ADSL48 Orange/ when the specified ADSL link is in connection
training state;
No Light LED off when ADSL link is not in service
Red Lit Red when loss of signal occurs.
Note: Do not power off your IPAM-4800/4824 when LEDs “MAINT”, “ALARM”
and “FAULT” are blinking simultaneously.

The replaceable 10/100/1000BaseT or FX uplink/subtend module design

provides the flexibility of the network implementation. Up to 8 IPAM4800/2400
can be cascaded and managed as one unit

LAN Side (Uplink or Extension Side)

1*1000BaseT-MGNT + 2*1000BaseT

1*1000BaseT-MGNT+1*1000BaseT+
1*1000Fx(SX/LX)

9
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM

1.3 IPAM-4800/4824 Application

As the following figure shown, IPAM-4800/4824 provides 48/24
ADSL/ADSL2/2+ ports with built-in POTS splitters so that it provides
broadband data service over existing copper wires without affecting the
conventional voice service. IPAM-4800/4824, therefore, is a perfect solution
for both central office co-location and MTU/MHU markets.

10
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM

1.4 IPAM-4800/4824 Features

1.4.1 Cost Saving Solution for SMB

48/24 ports ADSL/ADSL2/ADSL2+ Subscriber Interface

10/100/1000BaseT or Fx Uplink/Subtend Interface (module selectable)

Build in POTS Splitter

Subtending capability allows up to 8 units to be cascaded and managed as

one unit

1.4.2 Excellent Management with Security

Microsoft NT/SNMP-based GUI EMS

Local RS-232 CLI, and Ethernet SNMP/TELNET management

Remote in-band SNMP/TELNET management

3-level user priviledge for system management

SNMP v1, v2c, v3

Firmware upload/download via FTP or TFTP

1.4.3 Advanced Function for Broadband Service Offering

IGMP snooping

Support up to 8 VCs, 128 MAC address per xDSL ports

Support up to 64*128 MAC address & 2K Multicast MAC address per

IPAM-4800/4824 system

Support 512 VLAN(any value in 4096)

Support Static VLAN and Port-based VLAN

Configurable packet size (64 to 1536)

11
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM

Security : VLAN filtering, MAC Filtering, IP Filtering, Access Control List by

MAC and IP address

Spanning Tree (802.1d) compliant

Traffic prioritization (802.1p)

Rate limiting by MAC and IP address

uplink Aggregation (802.3ad)

Future(SW upgrade) BRAS support 802.1x, DHCP Server & Relay, PPPoE,
MPLS, VLAN-based VPN, L3 router feature, L2TP

12
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM

1.5 IPAM-4800/4824 Specifications

System Architecture ADSL/ADSL2/ADSL2+ Interface
48/24 ports ADSL/ADSL2/ADS2+/SHDSL Downstream DMT data rate from 32
subscriber interface with built-in POTS kb/s up to 25 Mb/s; Upstream DMT
Splitter data rate from 32 kb/s to 1 Mb/s
One 1000BaseT MGNT+ Two 1000BaseT Comply with ITU G.992.1 (G.DMT),;
or one Giga LX Uplink/Subtend Interface G.DMT.bis; ITU G.992.2 (G.Lite); ANSI
(module selectable) T1.413 issue 2; ITU G.994.1
Subtending capability allows up to 8 units to (G.handshake) for ADSL, G.992.3 for
be cascaded and managed as one unit ADSL2, and G.992.5 for ADSL2+
Telco-50 pin Centronic connector for Extended power management
ADSL+POTS IN and POTS OUT capabilities to optimize power
consumption for each application
Maximum reach exceeding
20Kft(6.1Km)
Protocol Handling Capability Management
8 VCs per xDSL ports Microsoft NT/SNMP-based GUI
128 MAC address per xDSL ports EMS
64*128 MAC address Local RS-232 CLI, and Ethernet
2K Multicast MAC address SNMP/TELNET management
512 VLAN(any value in 4096) support Remote in-band SNMP/TELNET
Configurable packet size (64 to 1542) management
Firmware upload/download via FTP
or TFTP
SNMP v1, v2c, v3
LAN Side (Uplink or Extension Side)
1* 1000BaseT-MGNT + 2*1000BaseT

1*1000BaseT-MGNT+1*1000BaseT+
1*1000Fx(SX/LX/LH/ZX)

ATM MIBs Private MIBs

RFC 1514, 2515 DEFINITIONS OF ANY SPECIFIC PRIVATE TRAPS
MANAGED OBJECTS FOR ATM
MANAGEMENT
Physical condition Protocol
Dimension: STP; IGMP snooping; GMRP;
400mm(D)x440mm(W)x44mm(H) GVRP; LACP; LACP marker;
Weight: 6.8kg SNMP/UDP/IP/MAC/Ethernet
Power Operating Environment
AC Power: auto ranging 90~240 VAC, Operating Temperature: 0°~50 °C,
50-60 Hz, IEC connector 32°~122 °F
DC Power: -42~-56 VDC Storage Temperature: -30c°~70 °C,
Power Consumption: 150 watts -22°~158 °F
Humidity: 5% to 90% RH
non-condensing

13
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM

2
2.1 General
Getting Started

This chapter provides the installation instruction for the hardware

installation and system configuration of your IPAM-4800/4824 so that you
can start up quickly. It includes the following sections:

Unpacking your IPAM-4800/4824

This section describes how to unpacking your IPAM-4800/4824, and part
number explanation.

Hardware Installation
This section describes the power connection, loop connection and CID
connection.

Ways of management connection

This section describes how to engage in management connection by CLI
and Telnet.

14
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM

2.2 Unpacking your IPAM-4800/4824

This section describes how to unpack your IPAM-4800/4824. For a box of
IPAM-4800/4824, there may contain the following materials:

1. IPAM-4800/4824

2. Mounting bracket package

3. RJ-45 Ethernet cable

4. Power cord (AC power module only)

5. RS 232 cable to facilitate the connection between CID and PC

6. CD including user manaul and Quick Start Guide

7. A copy of Quick Start Guide

8. Accessory package
Any other accessories requested at time of ordering.
Check the contents of the package and inspect the unit for any signs of
damage. Report any defect to vendor’s customer service representative.
Retain all packing materials for future shipment.

15
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM

2.3 Hardware Installation

The IPAM-4800/4824 can be installed in a standard 19-inch rack, by using
the mounting brackets provided.

Mount the shelf on the rack using the large screws provided.

Follows the following procedures to connect and wire the system.

2.3.1 Safety Instruction

The following is the safety instructions for IPAM-4800/4824 before

installation:

1. Read and follows all warning notices and instructions of this user
manual.

2. The maximum recommended operating temperature for the

IPAM-4800/4824 is 50ºC. Care must be taken to allow sufficient air
circulation or space between units when the IPAM-4800/4824 is installed
inside a closed rack assembly and racks should safely support the
combined weight of all IPAM-4800/4824.

3. The connections and equipment that supply power to the

IPAM-4800/4824 should be capable of operating safely with the maximum
power requirements of the IPAM-4800/4824. In the event of a power
overload, the supply circuits and supply wiring should not become
hazardous.

4. The AC adapter must plug in to the right supply voltage. Make sure that
the supplied AC voltage is correct and stable. If the input AC voltage is
over 10% lower than the standard may cause the IPAM-4800/4824 to
malfunction.

5. Do not allow anything to rest on the power cord of the AC adapter, and
do not locate the product where anyone can walk on the power cord.

6. Generally, when installed after the final configuration, the product must
comply with the applicable safety standards and regulatory requirements
of the country in which it is installed. If necessary, consult for technical
support.

16
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM

7. A rare condition can create a voltage potential between the earth

grounds of two or more buildings. If products installed in separate building
are interconnected, the voltage potential can cause a hazardous condition.
Consult a qualified electrical consultant to determine whether or not this
phenomenon exists and, if necessary, implement corrective action before
interconnecting the products. If the equipment is to be used with
telecommunications circuit, take the following precautions:

Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm.

Never install telephone jacks in wet location unless the jack is specially
designed for wet location.

Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone

line has been disconnected at the network interface.

Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines (other than a

cordless telephone) during an electrical storm. There is a remote risk of
electric shock from lightning.

Do not use a telephone or other equipment connected to telephone lines to

report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak.

2.3.2 IPAM-4800/4824 Rear Panel Connection

The following figure shows the rear panel connection of IPAM-4800/4824:

Figure 2-1 IPAM-4800/4824 Rear Panel Connection

Step 1: Ground the IPAM-4800/4824 by connecting a grounded wire

17
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM

Step 2: Connect the ADSL line connector, a 50-pin centronic connector, of

IPAM-4800/4824 to CPE by using telco cable. Each line connector
supports 24 ports of ADSL/ADSL2/2+ for Data path from MDF(Main
Distribution Frame).

Step 3: Connect the phone connector, a 50-pin centronic connector, of

IPAM-4800/4824 to Exchange/PBX by using telco cable. phone connector
is an optional module supporting Voice path to Exchange/PBX; it must be
along with Line Connector.

Step 4: Connect the power adapter and plug it into an outlet.

2.3.3 IPAM-4800/4824 Front Panel Connection

Connect the uplink port of IPAM-4800/4824 to internet or downlink to the

other IPAM-4800/4824 for stacking by using the RJ-45 cable.
Furthermore, connect the CID port to the management station’s CID port
by using the RS-232 cable or connect the MGT port to the management
station’s Ethernet port by using RJ-45 in order to administer your
IPAM-4800/4824 through CLI or GUI EMS.

Figure 2-2 IPAM-4800/4824 Front Panel Connections

Note: Please refer to Appendix A: pin assignment of telco cable, RJ-45

and RS-232 cable for those connectors’ pin assignment.

18
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM

2.4 Ways of Management Connection

This section will tell you how to connect and manage your
IPAM-4800/4824 through CLI and EMS.

2.4.1 EMS(Element Management System)

The Element Management System (EMS) is more user- friendly than CLI
for your configuring IPAM-4800/4824. The HTML files embedded in
IPAM-4800/4824 are dynamically linked to the system’s functional
command sets. You can access a specified IPAM-4800/4824 through
EMS.

Perform initial configuration procedures as follows:

1. Click the EMS icon on the screen of autorun to install EMS into your
PC.

2. Before you start to connect to EMS, it is necessary that your PC’s IP

and IPAM-4800/4824’s IP are in the same group. Note:
IPAM-4800/4824’s default MGNT IP is 192.168.100.111

3. Create management IPs into the IPAM-4800/4824 so that the

authorized IP agent can manage IPAM-4800/4824 through EMS.
Connect to IPAM-4800/4824 with RS-232 or Ethernet cable, and then
write the IPs into IPAM-4800/4824 by telnet or CLI. Input the following
commands sequentially:

a. create snmp comm community public

b. create snmp host ip 192.168.100. xxx community public, where

192.168.100.xxx is the IP of your PC.

c. create snmp traphost ip 192.168.100.xxx community public version v1,

where 192.168.100.xxx is the IP of your PC.

Note: if to use CLI, bits per second, data bits, parity, and flow control
should be set as 9600, 8, none and 1 respectively.

4. Launch the EMS and then log in with the “Admin” for both user name
and password. Click on to enter the EMS system. Log in as usual.
(User account: Admin; Password: Admin)

19
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM

2.4.2 Command Line Interface (CLI)

The Command Line Interface is the most primary character based

configuration interface. Some of configurations not provided in Baliff can
be configured through CLI. You can access CLI from the terminal
emulation software.

The procedure of connecting to the CLI is as follows:

Start up the terminal emulation software on the management station.

If necessary, reconfigure the terminal-emulation software to match the

switch console port settings.

Bits per second 9600

Data bits 8
Parity None
Stop bits 1
Flow control None
Enter Admin when prompted for a user name and password. The
IPAM-4800/4824 prompt appears when you have logged in to the
management interface successfully.

2.4.3 Telnet Client

IPAM-4800/4824 supports only one Telnet client that you can use to
connect with. Telnet provides a simple terminal emulation that allows you
to see and interact with the CLI of IPAM-4800/4824. As with any remote
connection, the network interface IP address for the IPAM-4800/4824 must
be established.

20
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM

3 EMS Configuration
This Chapter describes how to install and set up the environment of EMS.
Once you finish it, a specified IPAM-4800/4824 can be managed remotely.
Next chapter will introduce how to manage the IPAM-4800/4824 through
EMS.

3.1 EMS Functions

EMS is divided into the task-oriented functional groups as follows, which
are further described in subsequent sections.

Session: Allow you to start and to terminate a session as well as to

shutdown the system.

Logout: Allow you to terminate current session without shutting

down the system.

Exit: Allow you to shut down the system.

Tools: Allow you to perform the following tools.

Evionmental options: alow you to define SNMP, Desktop and

Surveilance.

Territory Manager: Used to define the territory.

Agent Manager: Used to define agent IP addresses.

Telnet: alow you to login the CID screen of a specific agent IP

address.

Ping: used to check whether a particular IPAM-4800/4824 is

current connected to the agent or not.

User manager: Allow you to define a user profile, including login

ID and security level.

Windows: allow users to manage daughter windows in the EMS.

Cascade: allow users to cadcade Windows.

21
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM

Next Window: alow users to switch to next window.

Previous Window: alow users to switch to previous window.

Arrang Icons: those minimized icons will be locatd in the bottom

of EMS.

Help: allow users to view the software version.

About: software version is displayed.

3.1.1 Installation

Hardware and Software Requirements

The following checklist provides the minimum hardware and software
required to operate EMS.

Windows NT/2000/XP

Autorun CD

2GB Hard disk with a minimum of 650 MB of free space

An ethernet card.

Super VGA (800 x 600 resolution) or higher with 256 colors

CD-ROM drive

22
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM

Installing EMS
1. Insert Autorun CD into CD –ROM Drive.

2. From the autorun screen, double click the EMS icon to start the
installation process.

3. The welcome window of EMS Setup appears. Click on to

continue.

4. When the user information input window appears, enter your name and

company name respectively, and then click on to continue.

23
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM

Note: please uninstall previous version of EMS if you want to install a new
version.

5. When the Destination Location window appears, click the Browse button
to change the installation destination directory or simply use the default

setting “C:\Program Files\EMS\EMS-SD1. Then, click on

to continue,

24
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM

6. When the Select Program Folder window appears, you may either
choose the default program folder, “EMS\EMS-TH1”, or enter the name

you prefer. Then, click on to continue,

7. When the Start Copying Files window appears, you can confirm your
current settings, if you are satisfied with the settings, click on

to start copying files.

25
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM

8. When Setup Process Status window appears, the installation process is

now in progress. This window displays a bar indicating the percentage
of completion for the current installation. In addition, the names of the
files being installed appear above the bar until the installation is
complete.

9. At the end of the installation process, the following “FINISH” window

presents. Simply click on to complete setup. Now the

installation of EMS software is completed.

26
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM

10. After finishing the installation process, a shortcut of EMS is displayed

on the desktop. Click on to activate EMS directly.

3.1.2 Un-installation of EMS

1. Double click the Add/Remove Programs icon in Control Panel to run

27
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM

the un-installation procedure.

2. In Add/Remove Programs Properties dialogue box, selecting the

“EMS-SD1” folder and then click on to remove EMS.

3. After your clicking on , the following dialogue box then

prompts to you for confirmation. Click on to continue the

removal process.

28
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM

4. The following window, “un-installation completion status” appears. Click

to complete the removal process when

become enable, indicating that the process is completed.

3.1.3 Starting the System

Users can activate the EMS either from Promgrame manger or clicking the
shortcut icon on the desktop. From Program Manager, choose the
“C-COM” program group in the Program Manager window. Then, choose
the “EMS” program item to launch the program.

Note: before starting EMS, the SNMP comm command should be

configured as “rw” via CLI so that read-write permissions are given to
managers. For detailed instruction, refer to page 3.

29
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM

3.1.4 Logging into the System

1. Once the system is started, the Login window then prompts as follows.

2. Simply enter your user account ID and password respectively, and then

click on to login.

Default Account Supervisor

Default Password (blank)
Note: For the security concern, it is very important for you to change
your password afterwards.

To terminate the login, simply click on .

3. After launching EMS and logging in with a valid username and

password, the main window, C-COM EMS then prompts as shown in

30
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM

the following figure.

3.1.5 Terminating the System

To terminate the system at any time, simply choose the Exit command
from Session Menu. The system then terminates.

3.1.6 Logging out the Current Session

To terminate the current session, choose Logout command from Session

Menu. The user account, then, is logged out and Login window prompts for
a new login. Normally, this is used when a user wants to re-login in order to
gain a higher level of authority for certain operations.

3.2 Windows Arrangement

Users may open many daughter windows in the EMS. To benefit user’s
viewing every Window, Commands of the Windows manu is designed to
arrange daughter windows. Those commands will be inroduced
seperately.

31
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM

3.2.1 Cascade

Choose Cascade from Windows manu in the EMS manu bar.The cascade
command can cascade those opened windows as follows. User can select
a window to perform operations or view status simpliy by clicking on a
specified window.

3.2.2 Next Window

Next Window helps user to view next window so that it will bring the
window in the second layer to front.

3.2.3 Previous Window

Previous Window command can help user to bring the previous window to
front.

3.2.4 Arrange Icons

By slecting Arrange Icons of Windows Manu in the manu bar, it will locate

32
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM

those minimized daughter windows in the bottom left of EMS window as

the following figure shown. User can select a required icon to perform EMS
management.

3.3 Help
To view the version of NatBailiff, choose About command via Help menu,

as shown in the following figure. Click on to exit the window.

33
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM

3.4 Tools Menu Introduction

This chapter describes how to use tools in the EMS, including
Environmental options, Territory manager, Agent manager, user nanager
and Telnet, which are detailed in the following sections.

3.4.1 Environmental Options

Choose Environmental Options from Tools Menu, this Environment

daughter window then appears. By this function, user can config SNMP,
Desktop and Surveillance respectively.

SNMP Configuration
The SNMP Time-out Period and Retransmission times can be configured
as shown in the following steps:

1. Click on the TabControl (SNMP/Desktop/Surveillance) of SNMP that

will bring SNMP dialogue box to front.
2. Click on or to change the Time-out Period seconds and
Retransmission times.

3. Click on to submit your changes.

34
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM

Desktop configuration
The desktop is user for setting the map of a required territory.

1. Click on the tab of Desktop that will bring Desktop dialogue box to
front, as shown in the following figure.

2. Click on to quick start territory manager in which

users can define a dersired territory. Please refer to page 3 for more
details.

3. Click on to load the map of a territory or click on

to clear a loaded map. Note: the format of map is limited to

*.bmp, *.emf and *.wmf.

4. Click on to submit your setting, and then the map will apply
to the Mounted Agent.

35
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM

Surveillance configuration
1. Click on the tab of Surveillance that will bring the Surveillance
dialogue box to front, as shown in the following figure.

2. Click on or to change the mornitoring period.

3. Select the checkbox of Save expired records to save surveillance
archive, which can be browsed by clicking on the tab of Archieved
in the Event Log window as shown in the following figure:

4. Clicking on to choose the directory to record

surveillance data and press or to define expired period.

5. Click on to submit your settings.

36
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM

3.4.2 Territory manager configuration

Territoy manager help users to build up mornitoring territories and agents

could be categorized into different territories by users. That benefits users
to mornitor the status of PAMSPAN-2000 systems by territory. Territory
manager can be activated either from manu bar or from envoronmental
options.

Territory Manager window

Choose Territory Manager via Tools Menu, or Environmental option, and
then the Territory Management window appears.

If to add a territory to the system,

Click on , the Territory Name fields then cleared to blank for

entering the data.

Enter Territory Name and then become enable.

Click on to apply the territoy to the system. After that, you can
proceed to group management by Territory Management dialog box.

As the following figure shown, the agent, 192.168.100.176 is available in

the territory named ALL on the left. Users can shift the mornitoring territory
from ALL to Taipei simply by selecting Taipei in the Drop-down list on the
right.

37
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM

Choose the agent, 192.168.100.176 on the left and then click on .

The agent IP will appear on the right and will be mornitored under the
territory, Taipei.

Corresspondently, the Agent Desktop displays that Agent IP

192.168.100.176 has been moritored under the territroy, Taipei.

38
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM

If users want to move the agent IP from Taipei to other territory, select a

desired agent IP and click on to shift it to the left.

Click on to exit the window or continue to perform other

operations in the same window.

3.4.3 Agent Manager Configuration

All of the IPAM-4800/4824 agents that are to be managed by the EMS

must be “registered” to the system. The “registeration” process is to
make the system aware of agent’s IP address and alias name. Once an
agent is registered, it is put into the “demount” agent pool, which is still
“inactive” for the network monitor. You then have to activate it if you want it
to be monitored. An active agent can also be deactivated from the monitor
for certain operational purpose when necessary. Agent Manager is
designed for you to perform these operations.

Agent Manager window

Choose Agent Manager from Tools Menu, this window then appears.

39
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM

As mentioned above, Agent Manager is used to define the

IPAM-4800/4824 agent’s IP address and community string that are to be
used in the system, and to activate the system’s monitoring of an agent; to
deactivate an agent from the system’s monitoring.

If to add an agent to the system,

1. Select a territory that a new agent belongs to. Users can click on

to activate territory manager.

2. Click on , the data fields then cleared to blank for entering

the data. Enter values in fields, IP Address, Alias Name and
Description. The Apply buttons to the left of these fields then become
enable.

3. Click on to apply the agent to the system.

4. If to activate (so-called “Mount”) the system’s monitoring of an agent,
click on the required agent entry in the Demount agent list, then click

on . The agent will appear on the Mount agent list on the

right.

5. Click on to exit the window or continue to perform other

operations in the same window.

If to remove an agent from the system,

40
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM

1. Click the required agent in the Demount agent list, and then click

on . The agent will disappear.

2. Click on to exit the window or continue to perform other

operations in the same window.

If to change the information of an agent,

1. Select the required agent in the Demount agent list. The information of
the selected agent will then presented on the data fields.

2. Click on to Change IP, Alias Name, and Description and

then becomes enable.

3. Click on to apply the change to the system.

4. Click on to exit the window.

Note: user can only change alias and description of the agent in the Mount
agent list and changing IP is prohibited.

If to activate the system’s monitoring of an agent,

1. Select the required agent in the Demount agent list, and then click on

the Mount button . The agent will appear on the Mount agent list.

2. Click on to exit the window or continue to perform other

operations in the same window.

If to de-activate the system’s monitoring of an agent,

1. Select the required agent in the Mount agent list, and then click on the

Demount button . The agent will then disappears from the Mount
agent list and appears on the Demount agent list on the left.

2. Click on to exit the window.

Table 3-1 Agent Management Field Definition

Field Definition
IP Address ***.***.***.***
Alias name Name of IPAM-4800/4824
Description Note

41
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM

Agent Desktop (Network Monitor)

Agent Desktop (see below) is the main window for the network
administrators in performing their day-to-day network monitoring jobs.
Like the standard desktop of MS Windows, Agent Desktop appears at all
time once the system is started. First appears on the Agent Desktop is
the status of agents by an array of colors. By which you may monitor the
status of agents, and judge if they are normal or in situations of alarms.
You may then double click on the required agent IP to activate the event
log window. Similarly, the Mounted Agents Desktop can be started up by
double clicking on the icon of territory.

In the Agents Desktop, press to refresh the status of all agents.

Overall status
Overall status
of Agents by
of territory by
priority
priority

Legends:
Gray icon indicates that the agent is disconnected.

Green icon indicates that the agent is in normal condition.

Red icon indicates that “Major Alarm” is occurred to the agent and
requires network administrator’s attention. Network administrator
pays attention to alarms by looking into the alarms using Event
Log – Outstanding.

The red icon will turn into a yellow icon after the network
administrator has looked into the alarms. However, this does not
mean the situation is released. If any new alarm happens, yellow
will turn red.

42
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM

Black icon indicated that the agent is demounted.

Note: the priority of colors: Gray>red>yellow>green>black

Mounted Agent Desktop

Mounted agent desktop provides users with flexibity in viewing your
network using graphical presentation of network elements. Mounted agent
desktop can be easily activated by double clicking the icon of territory in
the agent desktop and apprears promptly as shown in the the following
figure. By the mounted agent desktop, the location of agents and overall
network status of a specific territory is presented.

Legends:

: This icon can be moved to where the agent is located in the map.
In addition, its color also changes with the status of the agent. For example,
the icon in red means that alarm is occurred to the agent and requires
network administrator’s attention.

3.4.4 Telnet

Users can use the Telnet to connect to a specific IPAM-4800/4824, and

43
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM

then monitor and interact with the system.

How to activate Telnet from Agent Desktop?

1. Select an agent IP on the Agent desktop.

2. Click on the right bottun of mouse and then select Telnet or choose
Telnet from tool manu in the EMS window’s manu bar. Then Telnet screen
will come up immdeiately.

3. Enter user name and password to access the CID screen.

Note: The default login and password are admin.

44
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM

3.4.5 Ping

Ping is a command used to determine whether a particular

IPAM-4800/4824 is currently connected to the agent. It works by sending a
packet to the specific IP address and waiting for reply.

How to activate Telnet from Agent Desktop?

1. Select an agent IP on the Agent desktop.

2. Click on the right bottun of mouse and then select Ping or choose it from
tool manu in the EMS window’s manu bar. Ping screen will come up
immediately and then starts to send packets to check the connection with
the IPAM-4800/4824.

3. After showing the connection status, the screen will be closed

automatically.

45
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM

3.4.6 User Manager window

The EMS for C-COM uses user accounts, password as well as power level
(system privileges) to control access and log in. There are three types of
privileges, Supervisor, Constructor and Tester.

Supervisor: The highest level. User with this privilige can access ANY
functions and data;
Constructor: User can set and modify the configuration of network
equipments.
Tester: user can run maintenance test, such as loop back function.
To perform user manager, proceed as follows,
1. Choose User Manager from Tools Menu to access this window.

From the following window, User Manager, you can add and remove
users as well as change passwords, which are used to control the login.

Table 3-2 User Manager Field Definition

Field Definition
User Account an ID to be used for login
User Name The full name of a user
Description Remarks for note purpose
Power Level Privileges; Administrator and tester
If to add a user account to the system,

1. Click on , the Security window then prompts.

46
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM

2. Enter the account information as described in Security window below.

3. Click on to exit the window or continue to perform other

operations in the same window.

If to remove a User Account from the system,

1. Select a user account by clicking on the desired entry in User Account

selection list. After selection, the designated one will be highlighted.

2. Click on to delete it.

3. Click on to exit the window or continue to perform other

operations in the same window.

If to change User Account Information,

1. Select a user account by clicking on the desired entry in User Account

selection list. After selection, the designated one will be highlighted.

2. Click on button, the Security window then prompts.

3. Change the account information as described in Security window

below.

4. Click on Close button to exit the window or continue to perform other

operations in the same window. 2. Click on Add button, the Security
window then prompts.

User Manager window -- Security

This window is a daughter window of User Manager window, and is used
when adding a user account or changing account information.

47
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM

1. Either or is selected, this window appears.

2. Enter data in the fields, User Account, User Name, Description,

Password as required. Re-enter the password in field, Verify
Password, for purpose of verification.

3. If to force the user to change their password at the next login, click on
the checkbox to the left of the field, To Change Password When
Login Next Time.

4. If to suspend a user account, click on the checkbox to the left of the field,
Account Suspended.

5. If to assign a new Power Level to the user, click on the desired entry in

the Demount list, then click on the Mount button, . The

selected Power Level entry will then be added to the Mount list on the
right.

6. If to remove a Power Level from the user, click on the desired entry in
the Mount list on the right, then click on the Demount button,

. The selected Power Level entry will then be removed.

7. Click on to complete the operation or to abort

the change. Either one is selected; the window is exited to User

48
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM

Manager Window.
Table 3-3 Register-Security Field Definition
Field Definition
User Account An ID to be used for login
User Name The full name of a user
Description Remark for note purpose
Password Any character string, including blank
Verify Password Re-enter the password as a confirmation
To change password If this is checked, the associated user needs to
when next login change their password at the next login.
Account Suspended Suspend the account.
Power Level Privileges; Administrator and tester

49
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM

4 Manage the IPAM-4800/4824

After successfully setting up the environment of EMS, you can manage
different IPAM-4800/4824 via your EMS remotely. This chapter will tell you
how to interact with a specified IPAM-4800/4824.

4.1 Activate Function Management Windows

Via EMS, users can remotely morniter the current status of a specified IP
DSLAM, and then proceed advanced configuration. To activate the
function management windows, choose a specified agent that you want to
manage, and then double click the agnet, or click the right button of the
mouse to select Function List, as shown in the following figure.,

After that, the function management windows, including Function List

window and Front panel status window, will prompt as shown in the
following figure.

50
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM

4.1.1 Function management Windows

The Function management windows, including function list window and

Front panel ststus window, which are provided to mornitor the
IPAM-4800/4824’s status in real time and configure related settings. They
will be introduced repectatively.

Function List Window:

From the Function List, users can activate a specified function immediately
by double clicking a specified item, as shown in the following figure.

51
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM

Front Panel Status Window

After choosing a speicified agent, the Freont Panel Status Window,
together with the Function List Winddow, will come out immediately to
present the current status of front panel of the IPAM-4800/4824. As to the
identification of front panel, refer to page 3 to get more information.

4.2 Default Setting

This section describes how to get the information of the default setting of
the IPAM-4800/4824.

1. Click on “Default Setting” from the Function List window.

The Default Setting window appears as follows:

52
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM

In the default setting window, the status of, IP, System, VCC connection,
DSL line profile and Alarm profile are displayed clearly. How to modify
them will be introduced in the following sections.

4.3 System Information

This section describes how to get and input the information of the
IPAM-4800/4824.

1. Double Click on “System Information” from the Function List Window.

The System Information window appears as follows:

53
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM

Input necessary information on those fields.

Table 4-1 Sysinfo field definition

Field Definition
Name Alias name of the IPAM-4800/4824
Location Location of the IPAM-4800/4824
Contact The contact person of the IPAM-4800/4824
Vendor The vendor of the IPAM-4800/4824
Object ID Vendor ID
DST This specifies if the Daylight Savings Time has been
enabled or not.
True:on
False: off
UpTime System up time
HwVersion Hardware version of the IPAM-4800/4824.
CPSwVersion Control plant version
Log Threshold This specifies the severity level of the trap equal to or
lower than that shall be logged. 0 represents log
threshold is diable. 1 is the lowest and represents
critical traps.
Valid values: 0-4
Time Zone Time zone
Valid values: Given below, are the valid values,
followed by their descriptions.
IDLW - International Date Line West
NT - Nome
HST - Hawaii Standard
CAT - Central Alaska
AHST- Alaska-Hawaii Standard
YST - Yukon Standard
PST- US Pacific Standard
MST- US Mountain Standard
CST- US Central Standard
EST- US Eastern Standard
AST- Atlantic Standard
NFST- Newfoundland Standard
NFT- Newfoundland
BRST-Brazil Standard
AT- Azores
WAT - West Africa
GMT - Greenwich Mean
UTC - Universal (Coordinated)
WET - Western European
CET - Central European

54
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM

FWT - French Winter

MET - Middle European
MEWT - Middle European Winter
SWT - Swedish Winter
EET - Eastern Europe, Russia Zone 1
IST - Israeli Standard
BT - Baghdad, Russia Zone 2
IT - Iran
ZP4 - "Russia Zone 3"
ZP5 - "Russia Zone 4"
INST - "Indian Standard"
ZP6 - "Russia Zone 5"
NST - "North Sumatra"
WAST - West Australian Standard
SSMT - South Sumatra, Russia Zone 6
JT- Java
CCT - China Coast, Russia Zone 7
ROK - Korean Standard
KST - Korean Standard
JST - Japan Standard, Russia Zone 8
CAST - Central Australian Standard
EAST - Eastern Australian Standard
GST - Guam Standard, Russia Zone 9
IDLE - International Date Line East
NZST - New Zealand Standard
NZT - New Zealand
Example: IDLW , that stands for International Date
Line West

3. Click on to submit your settings or to close the

window.

4.4 Current Event

Describes the facility for the network administrators to track and trace the
history of events happened and released. Current Event window can be
activated from Function list window.

There are three daughter windows provided to accomplish above tasks:

Outstanding Event: Allow you to view the outstanding events or status

and system information.

Closed Event: Allow you to trace events or status that are already
closed and are still within the surveillance period as defined in
Environment Options. It also allows you to view the system
information.

Archived: Allow you to browse the expired records.

Legends

55
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM

Icons The grade of Abbreviation Icons after the alarm has

alarm indicated been viewed.
Major Alarm MJ
Minor Alarm MN

Outstanding Event
This window allows you to view the outstanding events of specific agents.

If to view the event log of a specific agent,

1. Click “Current Event” from Function List window. The Event Log
window appears as follow:

Table 4-2 Outstanding Event Window Field Definitions

Field Description
Happen time The date/time when the event is occurred.
Agent The IP address of the agent associated
Grade Severity level of event or status.
DSL DSL Port
Site Down stream or upstream
Description The description of the event or status.

Closed Event
This window allows you to browse the closed alarms and events of
specified agents.

1. Click on the tab of Closed that will bring the Closed screen to front, as
the following figure shown:

56
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM

2. Click on to clear all records.

3. Click on to exit the window.

Table 4-3 Closed Event Window Field Definition

Field Description
Release Time The date/time when the event is closed.
Others Rest of the fields is as same as described in “Outstanding
Events”.

Archived
This window allows you to browse the expired records, which can be
configured in the Evironment window.

1. Click on the tab of Archived that will bring the Archived screen to front
as follows:

57
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM

2. Click on to clear all records.

3. Click on to exit the window.

4.5 System
This section allows users to perform commit and reboot that will be
introduced as follows:

4.5.1 Commit and Reboot

This section describes how to commit the current configuration to falsh or

reboot the IPAM-4800/4824.

1. Double Click on “Commit and Reboot” from the Function List Window.

The System Information screen appears as follows:

58
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM

2. If to commit the active configuration to the flash, click on .

3. If to reboot the system and to set the boot configuration, click on

4. Click on to close the System Configuration window.

4.6 Configuration
This section describes how to configure the IPAM-4800/4824 by selecting
Configuration from Function List window. This section will cover those
functions:

4.6.1 VLAN Configuration

Allow user to view and modify VLAN configuration. To configure VLAN,

proceed as follows:

1. Double Click on “VLAN configuration” from the Function List Window.

The VLAN configuration window appears as follows:

59
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM

2. Select the VLAN to view or modify by using the VLAN ID drop-down list.

3. Use Egress PVC and Unatagged PVC drop-down list to set the
specified DSL port’s Egress PVC and Untagged PVC.

4. Click on to submit your settings or click on to

close the VLAN Configuration window.

Table 4-4 VLAN Configuration Field Definitions

Field Definition
VLAN ID The VLAN id for this VLAN. In devices supporting "Shared
Vlan for multicast" capability, the information for a multicast
mac addr is shared across vlans hence vlan id is an
optional parameter. In devices supporting "Independent
Vlan for multicast" capability each vlan can have its own
information for a multicast mac addr hence vlanid is a
mandatory parameter in all the commands other than - get.
For No Vlan case vlan id is not required.
VLAN Name Name of the VLAN
Egress PVC The set of ports, which are permanently assigned to the
egress list for this VLAN by management.
Untagged PVC The set of ports, which should transmit egress packets for
this VLAN, as untagged.

4.6.2 Ethernet Configuration

Allow user to view and modify Etherent configuration. To view or configure

Ethernet, proceed as follows:

60
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM

1. Double Click on “Ethernet configuration” from the Function List

Window. The Ethernet Configuration window appears.

2. To view the Ethernet Configuration of UPLINK1, UPLINK2, or UPLINK3

by using the Slect Ethernet drop-down list.

3. If to modify the Ethernet Configuration, click on first and

then proceed advanced configurations as shown in the following figure.

4. Click on to submit your settings or click on to

close the Ethernet Configuration window.

Table 4-5 Ethernet Configuration Field Definitions

Field Definition
DHCP DHCP client enabled or disabled
Type Upstream or downstream
Admin Status The desired state of UPLINK (enable/disable)
Operation Status System is enabled or not.
IP address IP address of the UPLINK
Mask This specifies the network mask configured for the
UPLINK.
Gateway Gateway IP
Mgmt Vlan Index VLAN for management traffic on this interface.

61
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM

Nonzero value of this field is valid only if either 'ip'

field is non-zero or 'usedhcp' field is true. If no
Management Vlanid is specified (in the create
operation) or its value is set to zero (either in create
or modify operation) then the system shall use the
value of 'portvlanid' associated with the bridge port
created on this interface as the Management Vlan
Index. In case the management vlan (i.e.
'mgmtvlanid' or the associated 'portvlanid', if
'mgmtvlanid' is zero) doesn't exist on the system then
management shall not happen on this interface till the
corresponding VLAN is created with the Net side port
as its member.

4.6.3 Static Multicast Configuration

Allow user to view and modify Static Multicast configuration. To view or

modify Static Multicast configuration, proceed as follows:

1. Double Click on “Ethernet configuration” from the Function List

Window. The Static Multicast Configuration window appears.

2. Select the VLAN ID to view or modify by using the VLAN ID drop-down

list.

3. Use Egress PVC and Forbidden Egress PVC drop-down list to set the
specified DSL port’s Egress PVC and Forbidden Egress PVC.

62
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM

4. Click on to submit your settings or click on to

close the VLAN Configuration window.

Table 4-6 VLAN Configuration Field Definitions

Field Definition
VLAN ID The VLAN id for this VLAN. In devices supporting "Shared
Vlan for multicast" capability, the information for a multicast
mac addr is shared across vlans hence vlan id is an
optional parameter. In devices supporting "Independent
Vlan for multicast" capability each vlan can have its own
information for a multicast mac addr hence vlanid is a
mandatory parameter in all the commands other than - get.
For No Vlan case vlan id is not required.
Multicast address A multicast address is an address that designates a
group of entities within a domain.
Egress PVC The set of ports, which are permanently assigned to the
egress list for this VLAN by managemen.

Forbidden Egress PVC The set of ports, which should transmit egress packets for
this VLAN, as untagged.

4.7 DSL
This section describes how to configure DSL settings by selecting DSL
from Function List window. This section will cover those functions:

4.7.1 Profile Configuration

Allow users to configure Line Profile and alarm profile.

Line Profile Configuration

If to configure Line Profile, proceed as follows.

1. Double Click on “Line Profile configuration” from the Function List

Window. The Line Profile configuration window appears.

63
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM

To creat up a new line profile, click the DSL Name drop-down list and then
select the blank.

After that, the fields become enable. Input the values in those fields and
then name the new line profile.

Click on to submit your setting or click on to deliete a

line profile.

Table 4-7 Line Profile Field Definitions

Field Definition
Line Type The ADSL line type, Fast or Interleaved
Transmit Rate Adaption Defines what form of transmitting rate to be
adaptated, fixed or adaptAtStartup
Target SNR (dB/10) Target Signal / Noise Margin.(0-310)
Min Tx Rate(bps) The minimum transmitting rate of ATU-C side
or ATU-R side.
Down Shift SNR (dB/10) Configured Signal/ Noise Margin for rate
downshift. If the noise margin falls below this
level, the modem should attempt to decrease
its transmit rate. In the case that RADSL
mode is not present, the value will be 0.
IntCorrectionUP Sets the correction time for the upstream
interleaved buffer. RS can also be disabled.
Value:125us | 250us | 500us |1ms | 2ms |
4ms | disable

64
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM

Preferred Standard Preferred standard compliance. Outcome is

dependent
upon standard support of the remote
unit.GlobespanVirata High Speed ADSL DMT
(ADSL+) applications only
Value: t1413 |gLite | gDmt | alctl14
|multimode | adi | alctl
|t1413Auto|adslPlus|GspanPlus
Maximum Transmit Rate The maximum transmitting rate of ATU-C side
or ATU-R side.
Interleave Delay (ms) The value of Interleave Delay for this
channel.
UP Shift SNR (dB/10) Configured Signal/ Noise Margin for rate
upshift. If the noise margin rises above this
level, the modem should attempt to increase
its transmit rate. In the case that RADSL is
not present, the value will be 0.
IntCorrectionDown This parameter sets the correction time for
the downstream interleaved buffer. RS can
also be disabled.

Alarm Profile Configuration

If to configure Alarm Profile, proceed as follows.

1. Double Click on “Alarm Profile Configuration” from the Function List

Window. The Alarm Profile Configuration window appears.

2. To creat a new alarm profile, click the DSL Name drop-down list and
then select the blank.

3. After that, the fields become enable. Input the values in those fields and
then name the new alarm profile.

65
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM

4. Click on to submit your setting or click on to

deliete a alarm profile.

Table 4-8 Alarm Profile Field Definitions

Field Definition
Loss of frame within 15 The threshold of the number of “Loss of Frame
minutes Seconds” within 15 minutes performance data
collection period.
Loss of signal within 15 The threshold of the number of “Loss of Signal
minutes Seconds” within 15 minutes performance data
collection period.
Loss of link within 15 The threshold of the number of “Loss of Link
minutes Seconds” within 15 minutes performance data
collection period. (But only ATU-C side)
Loss of power within 15 The threshold of the number of “Loss of Power
minutes Seconds” within 15 minutes performance data
collection period.
Errored seconds The threshold of the number of “Errored Seconds”
within 15 minutes performance data collection period.

4.7.2 Port Configuration

Allow users to proceed port configuration. The procedures are as follows:

Double Click on “Port Configuration” from the Function List Window. The
Port Configuration window appears.

Choose the port to configure from the DSL Port drop-down list.

Configure the Administration status as “Up” or “Down”.

Choose a Line Profile from the Line Profile Name drop-down list. If to

configure a Line Profile, Click on to activate the Line Profile

Configuration window.

66
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM

Choose an Alarm Profile from the Alarm Profile Name drop-down list. If to

configure an Alarm Profile, Click on to activate the Alarm Profile

Configuration window.

If necessary, modify values of a specified PVC, including VPI, VCI, Admin

Status, Learning Status, Sticky Status, Pvid, Accepted Frame Type and
Ingress Filter, and prioriy.

Click on to submit your settings or click on to

close the fmBridgeport window.

Table 4-9 Port Configuration Field Definitions

Field Definition
DSL Port Port No. of the IPAM-4800/4824
VPI Virtual Path Identifier
VCI Virtual Channel Identifier
Learning Status The state of learning on this bridge port. The value
enable (1) indicates that unicast Mac address
learning is enabled and the value disable indicates
that unicast Mac address learning is disabled on this
bridge port.
Sticky Status Indicates if the port has been set as sticky. The value
enable (1) indicates that the entries learned on this
port will not be aged out. It also indicates that the
entries learned on this port shall not be learned on
any other port. The entries learned on this port can
only be removed by management action or by
making the value as disable (2), so that the entries
can be aged out.
Pvid Port VID
Accepted Frame Type Used to up/down connection.
Ingress Filter When this is true, the device will discard incoming
frames for VLANs, which do not include this Port in its
Member set. When false, the port will accept all
incoming frames.
Priority Optional Connection priority. No VLAN tag, no
priority.

4.8 DSL Performance Management

This section describes how to ultilize DSL Performance Management by
selecting DSL Performance Management from Function List window.
This section will cover those functions:

4.8.1 Physical Layer Info

Allow users to view the physical layer information of a specified DSL port

67
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM

from the IPAM-4800/4824. The procedures are as follows:

Double Click on “Physical Layer Info” from the Function List Window. The
Physical Layer Info window appears.

Select the port ID from the DSL Port drop-down list to view a specified
DSL’s physical Layer Info.

Click on to close the window.

Table 4-10 Physical Layer Info Field Definitions

Field Definition
SNR margin Noise margin value. (dB)
Attenuation Difference in the total power transmitted and the total
power received by the peer atu. (db)
Status Current status of the ATU line. The possible values
displayed are as follows:
No defect: there are no defect on the line
los: atu-r failure due to not receiving signal
lpr: atu-r failure due to loss of signal
output power Total output power transmitted by atu. (dBm)
attainable rate The maximum currently attainable data rate by the
atu. (kbps)
ActualStandard Actual standard used for connection, based on the
outcome of the negotiation with the Remote Unit.
Bert Error Provides the number of bit errors detected during
BERT.
TxAtm CellCt Provides Tx ATM cell counter.
RxAtm CellCt Provides Rx ATM cell counter.
Start Progress Defines the current detailed start up state of Xcvr.
0x0 – startup not in progress; 0x0 – 0x0FFF
Handshake/Training/ Profile Management/ Fast
Retrain in progress; 0x8000 – 0x8FFF DSP firmware

68
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM

Down- Load in progress; 0xF000 – 0xFFFF illegal

Parameter
Idle Bert Error Number of bit errors.
Idle Bert Cells Number of idle cells.
Bert Sync Indicates whether the Signal is in Sync or not.
Select Information Valid Indicates the information validity for the SELT
operation conducted on the Xcvr.
Select Loop Length Indicates the LOOP Length in Feet once when the
SELT information is valid on the Xcvr.
Select Loop End Indicates whether the loop is short or open once
when the SELT information is valid on the Xcvr.
Select Loop Gauge Indicates the LOOP wire gauge information once,
when the SELT information is valid on the Xcvr.

4.8.2 Channel Layer Info

Allow users to view the Channel layer information of a specified DSL port
from the IPAM-4800/4824. The procedures are as follows:

Double Click on “Channel Layer Info” from the Function List Window. The
Channel Layer Info window appears.

Select the port ID from the DSL Port drop-down listo view a specified
DSL’s channel Layer Info.

Click on to close the window.

Table 4-11 Channel Layer Information Field Definitions

Field Definition
Interleave delay Interleave delay for this channel. (milli-seconds)
Previous TX rate Previous actual transmit rate on this channel if ADSL
loop retain. (kbps)
Current TX rate Actual transmit rate on this channel. (kbps)
CRC block length The length of the channel data-block on which the CRC

69
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM

operates.
Current Atm Status Indicates the current ATM Status.
Rs Symbols Indicates the number of DMT symbols per
Reed-Solomon code word (S), in the downstream
direction.
Rs Depth Indicates interleaving depth (D), in the downstream
direction.
Rs Redundency Indicates the number of redundant bytes (R), per
Reed-Solomon code in the downstream direction

4.8.3 Physical Layer PM

Allow users to view the Pysical layer performance of a specified DSL port
from the IPAM-4800/4824. The procedures are as follows:

Double Click on “Pysical Layer PM” from the Function List Window. The
Physical Layer PM window appears.

Press Co or RT tab to view the Pysical Layer Performance data at down

stream or up stream.

Click on Current to activated Current page in which users can select Port
No. to view 15 minutes and 1 Day ES, SES and UAS record. If to retrieve

the latest data, press .

Click on Previous to activate previous 15 minutes and 1 day performance

data page in which Period and Port No. are selectable. Note: refresh
button is disable in this page.

70
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM

Click on to clear the physical layer data.

Click on to close the window.

Table 4-12 Current Phy-Layer PM Information Field Definitions

Field Definition
CO down stream
RT up stream
Lofs Number of lof failures since reset.
Loss Number of los failures since reset.
Lols Number of lol failures since reset.
Lprs Number of lpr failures since reset.
Ess Number of error seconds since reset.
Inits Number of initialization attempts since reset. It
includes both successful and failed attempts.
Current 15-min lofs Number of seconds in the current 15-minute
interval during which lof was detected.
Current 15-min loss Number of seconds in the current 15-minute
interval during which los was detected.
Current 15-min lols Number of seconds in the current 15-minute
interval during which lol was detected.
Current 15-min lprs Number of seconds in the current 15-minute
interval during which lpr was detected.
Current 15-min ess Number of error seconds in the current
15-minute interval.
Current 15-min inits Number of inits in the current 15-minute
interval. It includes both successful and failed
attempts.
Current 1-day time elapsed Number of seconds that have elapsed since

71
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM

Field Definition
the beginning of the current 1-day interval.
Current 1-day lofs Number of seconds in the current 1 day
interval during which lof was detected.
Current 1-day loss Number of seconds in the current 1 day
interval during which los was detected.
Current 1-day lols Number of seconds in the current 1 day
interval during which lol was detected.
Current 1-day lprs Number of seconds in the current 1 day
interval during which lpr was detected.
Current 1-day ess Number of error seconds in the current 1 day
interval.

4.8.4 Channel Layer PM

Allow users to view the Channellayer performance of a specified DSL port

from the IPAM-4800/4824. The procedures are as follows:

Double Click on “Channel Layer PM” from the Function List Window. The
Channel Layer PM window appears.

Press Co or RT tab to view the Channel Layer Performance data at down

stream or up stream.

Click on Current to activated Current page in which users can select Port
No. to view 15 minutes and 1 Day ES, SES and UAS record. If to retrieve

the latest data, press .

72
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM

Click on Previous to activate previous 15 minutes and 1 day performance

data page in which Period and Port No. are selectable. Note: refresh
button is disable in this page.

Click on to clear the channel layer data.

Click on to close the window.

Table 4-13 Current Channel-Layer PM Information Field Definitions

Field Definition
CO down stream
RT up stream
Received blocks The total number of blocks of data received since the
last agent reset.
Transmitted blocks The total number of blocks of data transmitted since
the last agent reset.
Corrected blocks Number of corrected blocks of data transmitted since
the last agent reset.
Uncorrected blocks Number of corrected blocks of data transmitted since
the last agent reset.
Current 15-min received Number of blocks of data received during the current
blocks 15-minute interval.
Current 15-min Number of blocks of data transmitted during the current
Transmitted blocks 15-minute interval.
Current 15-min corrected Number of corrected blocks of data transmitted during
blocks the current 15-minute interval.
Current 15-min Number of uncorrected blocks of data transmitted
Uncorrected blocks during the current 15-minute interval.
current 1-day time Number of seconds that have elapsed since the start of
elapsed the current day interval.
Current 1-day received Number of blocks of data received during the current

73
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM

Field Definition
blocks day interval.
Current 1-day transmitted Number of blocks of data transmitted during the current
blocks day interval.
Current 1-day corrected Number of corrected blocks of data transmitted during
blocks the current day interval.
Current 1-day uncorrected Number of uncorrected blocks of data transmitted
blocks during the current day interval.

74
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM

5 System Administration with CLI

Command Line Interface (CLI) is the primary user interface to Administrate
the system. CLI can be accessed either from the CID port or telnet session.
All CLI commands are simple strings designed for the Administrator to
manage your IPAM-4800/4824 easily. This chapter contains the whole CLI
cmmands. If to understand primary CLI commands, refer to chapter 6 in
which frequently used CLI commands are summerized.

5.1 Notation Conventions

• Keywords in a command that you must enter exactly as shown are
presented in bold italics.

User specified values in a command are presented in regular typeface, i.e.,

not bold or italic.

Parameter values enclosed in < > must be specified.

Parameters enclosed in [ ] are optional. All modify parameters are shown

as optional in CLI commands even if there exists only a single parameter.

Parameter values are separated by a vertical bar ì|î only when one of the
specified values can be used.

Parameter values are enclosed in { } when you must use one of the values
specified.

Parameters are enclosed in [ ]+ when you can specify the parameter one
or more times, in the command line.

5.2 Command Structure

There are three-level command structure used in the system. All
commands have the following general format:

<Action><Group><Sub group><Sub sub group> <tag1 value1>Ö<tagN

valueN>

Action This is the first keyword of a CLI command. It indicates the

type of operation to be performed.

75
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM

"create" is an example of this keyword.

<Group>. This is the second keyword of a CLI command. It indicates
the group of a CLI command.

"bridge" is an example of this keyword.

<Sub group>. This is the third keyword of a CLI command. It indicates the
sub group of a CLI command.

"port" is an example of this keyword

<Sub sub group>. This is the fourth keyword of a CLI command. It indicates the
sub group of a CLI command.

"intf" is an example of this keyword.

<tag1 value1> These are <tag value> pairs and can vary from 0 to N. They
<tagN valueN>. indicate the parameter values passed to a CLI command.

"ifname aal5- 0", "portid 20", are examples of tag value pairs.

5.3 Glossary of Terms and Acronyms

Abbreviation
Description
AAL5 ATM Adaptation Layer 5
ACL Access Control list
ADSL Asymmetric Digital Subscriber Line
Attribute An element of an MO
ATM Asynchronous Transmission Mode
CLI Command Line Interface
CP Control Plane
DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
DP Data Plane
DSL Digital Subscriber Line
EOA Ethernet over ATM
GARP Generic Attribute Registration Protocol
GMRP GARP Multicast Registration Protocol
GVRP GARP VLAN Regenration Protocol
GARP VLAN Regenration Protocol
IGMP InternetGroup Management Protocol
Index An element of a tabular MO that uniquely
identifies an entry
IP Internet protocol
IRL Input Rate Limiting
IVL Individual VLAN Learning
IVM Individual VLAN for Multicast
LACP Link Aggregation Control Protocol
LAN Local Area Network
Management Entity The entity, modified, controlled and
ME
monitored through MOs.
MO Identifier A unique number that identifies an MO.
MO ID Interpretation of the information passed to GenAg for an MO
depends upon this identifier

76
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM
Managed Object Logical unit of manageable information. It is
MO similar to a MIB. An ME is visible to the outside world in the
form of one or more MOs that constitute it.
GAG supports five operations - Create, Delete, Modify, Get,
Operations
Get-Next
ORL Output Rate Limiting
OAM Operations Administration and Management
RMON Remote Monitoring
STP Spanning Tree Protocol
SNTP Simple Network Time Protocol
SVL Shared VLAN Learning
SVM Shared VLAN for Multicast
Specific Agent Entities that use GenAg interfaces to manage the system
TEA Target Engine Agent
VC Virtual Channel
VLAN Virtual LAN

5.4 CLI Command Brief Description

Table 4-1 CLI Command - Action List

<action> Description
get Used to view information of the selected identifier and
parameters.
reset Used to reset a port of system.
modify Used to set or modify existing configuration of objects
corresponding to the identifier and parameters.
Create Used to create configuration of objects corresponding to the
identifier and parameters.
delete Used to delete configuration of objects corresponding to the
identifier and parameters. If the delete action is confirmed, the
configuration of objects will no longer exist.
help Used to view the detailed usage of CLI commands.
reset Used to reset a port of system.
reboot Used to restart the system.
save Used to save the configuration to Flash RAM.
logout Used to terminate the CLI.
commit Used to commit the active configuration to the flash.
passwd Used to change the password associated with a user login.
apply Used to apply a configuration file stored on the system
download Used to download a binary, configuration or user specific file
from theremote host.
list Used to list the Configuration or binary files stored on the unit
remove Used to remove a configuration or binary file stored on the unit
upgrade Used to upgrade a configuration or binary file stored on the
system.
alias Used to create an alias for any CLI command.
unalias Used to delete an alias.
prompt Used to set the new CLI prompt.
traceroute Used to trace the route to the specified destination.

77
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM
<action> Description
verbose Using this command, a user can view the status of entries before
and after the execution of a command (create, delete, modify,
get).

5.4.1 Calling Commands

To recall commands from the history buffer, perform one of these tasks.

Command Task
The up arrow key Recall commands in the history buffer, beginning
with the most recent command. Repeat the key
sequence to recall successively older commands.
The down arrow key Return to more recent commands in the history
buffer after recalling commands with “the up arrow
key”. Repeat the key sequence to recall
successively more recent commands.

78
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM

5.5 Commands Group Description

5.5.1 Interface Commands

get interface stats

Description: Use this command to view statistics for one interface or all
the interfaces.
Command Syntax: get interface stats [ifname interface-name ]

Parameters
Name Description
Interface name, for which configuration is to be
modified or viewed.
Ifname interface-name Type: Get -Optional Modify - Mandatory
Valid values : eth-*,atm-*,aal5-*, eoa-*, dsl-*, dslf-*,
dsli-*, aggr-*, ehdlc-*.
Indicates whether linkUp/linkDown traps should be
generated for this interface.
trap enable|disable
Type: Modify – Optional Valid values : enable Or
disable

Example $ get interface stats ifname eth-0

Output Verbose Mode On

Output Fields
Field Description
This uniquely identifies the interface, for which infor-
mation is being displayed. It may be: eth-0, eth-1,
Interface
atm- *, aal5-*, eoa-*, dsl-*, dslf-*, dsli-*, aggr-*, eh-
dlc-*.
Description This is general information about the interface
The type of interface, distinguished according the
physical/link/network protocol, immediately below
Type
the IP layer. It may be: ATM, ETHERNET, AAL5,
EOA, DSL, FAST, INTERLEAVED, AGGR. EHDLC.
The size (in bytes) of the largest packet, which can
Mtu
be sent/received on this interface in octets.
Bandwidth The current bandwidth of the interface, in bps.
Phy Addr Interface's address, at its protocol sublayer.
This is the desired state of the interface. It may be:
Admin Status
Up, Down.

79
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM
This is the current operational state of the interface.
Operational Status
It may be: Up, Down.
Value of System UpTime (in seconds) at the time
Last Change
the interface entered its current operational state.
The number of packets received via the interface,
Unknown Prot Pkts which were discarded because of an unknown or
unsupported protocol.
The total number of octets received on the interface,
including the framing characters. For Ethernet inter-
In Octets faces, this will have the lower 32 bits of HC in octets.
Valid for atm-*, eoa-*, aal5-*, eth-0, eth-1, dsl-*,
dslf*, dsli-*, aggr-*.
The total number of octets transmitted out of the in-
terface, including framing characters. For Ethernet
interfaces, this will have the lower 32 bits of HC Out
Out Octets
octets.
Valid for atm-*, eoa-*, aal5-*, eth-0, eth-1, dsl-*,
dslf*, dsli-*, aggr-*.
The number of inbound packets, which were
In Discards
discarded, though no errors were detected.
The number of outbound packets chosen to be
Out Discards
discarded even though there were no errors.
The number of inbound packets, which were not
In Errors
delivered to upper layers because of errors.
The number of outbound packets chosen to be
Out Errors
discarded because there were errors.
The number of unicast packets delivered to a higher
In Ucast Pkts
layer protocol.
The total number of packets requested to be sent to
Out Ucast Pkts
unicast addresses, by upper layer protocols.
The total number of octets received on the interface,
including framing characters. This object is a
HC In Octets
64-bit version of ifInOctets.
Valid for eth-*.
The total number of octets transmitted out of the
interface, including framing characters. This
HC OutOctets
object is a 64-bit version of ifOutOctets.
Valid for eth-*.
The number of multicast packets delivered to a
In Mcast Pkts
higher layer protocol.
The total number of packets requested to be sent to
Out Mcast Pkts
multicast addresses, by upper layer protocols.
The number of broadcast packets delivered to a
In Bcast Pkts
higher layer protocol.
The total number of packets requested to be sent to
Out Bcast Pkts
broadcast addresses, by upper layer protocols.
Indicates whether linkUp/ linkDown traps should be
LinkUpDnTrapEnable
generated for this interface.
This object has a value of false if this interface only
accepts packets/frames that are addressed to this
station. This object has a value of true when the
station accepts all packets/frames transmitted on
Promiscous Mode
the media. The value true is legal only for Ethernet
interfaces. The value of PromiscuousMode does
not affect the reception of broadcast and multicast
pack-ets/frames by the interface.
This indicates whether the interface sublayer has a
Connector Present physical connector or not. This is true only for phys-
ical Ethernet interfaces.
The value of sysUpTime on the most recent occa-
CounterDiscontTime sion, at which any one or more of this interface's
counters suffered a discontinuity.

80
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM

reset interface stats

Description: Use this command to reset the statistics of Ethernet, EoA,
ATM, AAL5, DSL, DSLF, DSLI, Aggr and EHDLC interfaces.
Command Syntax: reset interface stats ifname ifname

get interface config

Description: Use this command to view Interface Configuration.
Command Syntax: get interface config ifname ifname

modify interface config

Description: Use this command to modify interface configuration.
Command Syntax: modify interface config ifname ifname [trap
enable|disable]

Parameters
Name Description
Ifname interface-name Interface name, for which configuration is to be
modified or viewed.
Type: Get -Optional Modify - Mandatory
Valid values : eth-*,atm-*,aal5-*, eoa-*, dsl-*, dslf-*,
dsli-*, aggr-*, ehdlc-*.

Indicates whether linkUp/linkDown traps should be

generated for this interface.
trap enable|disable
Type: Modify – Optional Valid values : enable Or
disable

Example $ get interface config

Output Verbose Mode On

IfName LinkUp/DnTrap
----------------------------------------------------------
aal5-0 Enable

Output Fields
FIELD Description
Interface name, for which configuration is to be
IfName
viewed.
Indicates whether linkUp/linkDown traps shall be
LinkUp/DnTrap
generated for this interface.

Caution None

References •
• ATM Interface commands
• Ethernet commands
• EoA commands

81
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM

5.5.2 ATM Interface Commands

create atm port

Description: Use this command to create an ATM Port.
Command Syntax: create atm port ifname interface-name lowif
dsl-portinterface-name [enable | disable] [Maxvpibits
maxvpibits][Maxvcibits maxvcibits] [Orl Orl]

delete atm port

Description: This command is used to delete an ATM port.
Command Syntax: delete atm port ifname interface-name

get atm port

Description: Use this command to get information about a specific or all
ATM ports.
Command Syntax: get atm port [ifname interface-name]

modify atm port

Description: Use this command to enable or disable the administrative
status of ATM port.
Command Syntax: modify atm port ifname interface-name [enable | disable]
[maxvcs maxvcs] [Maxvpibits maxvpibits]
[Maxvcibitsmaxvcibits][Orl Orl]

Parametersame Description
This specifies the name of the ATM port
Type: Create - Mandatory
Delete -Mandatory
ifname interface-name
Get - Optional
Modify -Mandatory
Valid values : atm-0 - *
This specifies the maximum number of VCCs
(PVCCs), supported at this ATM interface.
Type : Optional
maxvc max-num-vccs Valid values :
1 -GS_CFG_MAX_ATM_VC_PER_PORT
Default Value :
GS_CFG_DEF_ATM_VC_PER_PORT
Maximum number of VPI bits configured for use at
this ATM interface.
Maxvpibits max-vpi-bits Type : Optional
Valid values : 1 to 8.
Default Value :
Maximum number of VCI bits configured for use at
this ATM interface.
maxvcibits max-vci-bits Type : Optional
Valid values : 1 to 16.
Default Value: 16.
Administrative status of the ATM port
Type : Optional
enable|disable
Valid values : enable or disable
Default Value: enable
This identifies the lower DSL interface, on which
lowif dsl-port-
this ATM interface is configured.
interface-name
Type : Mandatory.

82
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM
Valid values : dsl-*

This parameter specifies the output rate limiting

val-ue in Kbps to be applied on this interface.
Type: create – Optional
Orl orl
Valid values :
GS_CFG_MIN_ORL_ATM_RATE_KBPS –
GS_CFG_MAX_ORL_ATM_RATE_KBPS

Example: $ create atm port ifname atm-0 lowif dsl-0 maxvc 4 utput

Output Verbose Mode On

IfName : atm-0 LowIfName :

dsl-0
MaxVccs : 4 MaxConfVccs : 0
MaxVpiBits : 9 MaxVciBits : 10
OAMSrc : 0xffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffff
ORL (kbps) : 640 Class0thrshld :
2
Class2thrshld : 2 RowStatus :
Active
UnknownVPI : 2ProfileName : gold Class1thrshld :
3
UnknownVCI : 3

Class3thrshld : 3

Oper Status : Up Admin Status :

Up

Output Fields
FIELD Description
This specifies the name of the ATM port. It can be:
IfName
atm-0, atm-1, etc.
This specifies the name of the lower interface. It can
LowIfName
be: dsl-0, dsl-1 etc,.
The maximum number of VCCs (PVCCs) supported
Max Vccs
at this ATM interface.
This specifies the current number of VCCs
MaxConfVccs configured on this port. It may be : 0 - Value
defined in MaxVccs
The maximum number of active VPI bits configured
MaxVpiBits
for use at the ATM interface.
This specifies the maximum number of active VCI
MaxVciBits
bits configured for use at this ATM interface.
The actual/current state of the interface. It can be
Oper Status
either Up or Down
The desired state of the interface. It may either be
Admin Status
Up or Down
This parameter specifies the output rate limiting
Orl (kbps)
value in Kbps to be applied on this interface.
RowStatus This defines the row-status of the interface entry.
This parameter specifies the last seen unknown
UnknownVPI
VPI on this ATM interface.
This parameter specifies the last seen unknown
UnknownVCI
VCI on this ATM interface.

Caution The specified lower interface should already be created. If the

parameter maxvcperport in nbsize command is modified, please
ensure that MaxConfVccs in atm port command is less than or equal
to maxvcperport.

83
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM
References • ATM VC commands
. • ATM statistics commands
. • DSL commands.

5.5.3 ATM VC Commands

create atm vc intf

Description: Use this command to create a new ATM Virtual Circuit (VC).
Command Syntax: create atm vc intf ifname interface-name vpi vpi vci vci
lowif atm-port-interface-name [enable | disable] [aal5]
[a5txsize aal5-cpcs-tx-sdu-size] [a5rxsize
aal5-cpcs-rx-sdu-size] [vcmux | llcmux] [pvc] [channel
fast|interleaved] [ mgmtmode data|mgmt|DataAndMgmt|
raw]

delete atm vc intf

Description: Use this command to delete an existing ATM Virtual Circuit
(VC).
Command Syntax: delete atm vc intf ifname interface-name

get atm vc intf

Description: Use this command to display information corresponding to a
single VC, or for all VCs.
Command Syntax: get atm vc intf [ifname interface-name]

modify atm vc intf

Description: Use this command to modify ATM VC parameters.
Command Syntax: modify atm vc intf ifname interface-name [vpi vpi] [vci vci]
{enable | disable} [a5txsize aal5-cpcs-tx-sdu-size]
[a5rxsize aal5-cpcs-rx-sdu-size] [ mgmtmode data | mgmt|
DataAndMgmt | raw]

Parameters
Name Description
This specifies name of VC Interface.
Type: Create – Mandatory Delete –
Mandatory
ifname interface-name
Get – Optional
Modify – Mandatory
Valid values : aal5-0 - *
Interface Index of the ATM port, on which this VC
lowif is getting configured.
atm-port-interface-name Type : Mandatory
Valid values : atm-0 - *
Virtual Path Identifier. In order to modify, the VPI
value shall be the new VPI value and the admin
status of VC interface shall be disabled. Also, the
vpi vpi VPI and VCI valaue cannot be modified along with
admin status in one command.
Type : Create – Mandatory Modify – Optional
Valid values : 0-2^8

84
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM
Virtual Circuit Identifier. In order to modify, the VCI
value shall be the new VCI value and the admin
status of VC interface shall be disabled. Also, the
vci vci VPI and VCI valaue cannot be modified along with
admin status in one command.
Type : Create – Mandatory Modify – Optional
Valid values : 1-2^16
It denotes the Management Mode of the ATM VC.
If it is Data, then only data transmission can take
place. If it is Mgmt, then management of remote
CPE device can happen on that ATM VC and
packets on that ATM VC shall start coming to
Control Plane. In DataAndMgmt mode, data
transmission as well as remote CPE management
can happen on the same ATM VC interface. In
DataAndMgmt mode, the only acceptable value for
atmVCCAAL5EncapType is llc. In Mgmt mode,
EoA interface cannot be created on the ATM VC
and both Ethernet as well as non-ethernet packets
on that ATM VC shall be received at the Control
Plane. In DataAndMgmt mode, if EoA is created,
mgmtmode Data | Mgmt | then only non-ethernet packets on that ATM VC
DataAndMgmt | Raw shall be received at the Control Plane. However, if
EoA is not created then all the packets on that
ATM VC shall be received at the Control Plane.
However, to configure ATM VC in DataAndMgmt
mode, a good practice is to to create ATM VC in
disable mode till EoA is created on it, to prevent
flooding at Control Plane. In order to run STP, the
mode has to be DataAndMgmt. If the mode is
RawATM(4), ATM cells are given to Control
Plane. In this mode, EoA interface can ot be
created on the ATM VC. If EoA interface is already
created on the ATM VC, its mode cannot be
changed to either Mgmt(2) or RawATM(4).
Type : Create Optional
Default value: Data
This specifies the Admin Status of the VC.
enable|disable Type : Optional
Default Value: enable
This specifies the AAL type in use for this VC. The
only type of AAL supported in Columbia Packet is
aal5 AAL5.
Type: The only value to be supported is aal5.
Default value : aal5
This specifies the maximum transmit CPCS SDU
size to be used.
Type : Optional
a5txsize
Valid values :
aal5-cpcs-tx-sdu-size
1-GS_CFG_ATM_VC_MAX_RX_PDU_SIZE
Default Value:
GS_CFG_ATM_VC_DEF_TX_PDU_SIZE
This specifies the maximum receive CPCS SDU
size to be used
Type : Optional
a5rxsize
Valid values :
aal5-cpcs-rx-sdu-size
1-GS_CFG_ATM_VC_MAX_TX_PDU_SIZE
Default Value:
GS_CFG_ATM_VC_DEF_TX_PDU_SIZE
This specifies the data multiplexing method to be
used over the AAL5 SSCS layer.
vcmux|llcmux
Type : Optional
Default Value: llcmux
This specifies the type of VC. The only value
Pvc supported is PVC.
Type : Optional

85
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM
Default Value: pvc

This extension specifies the type of channel, on

which the ATM VC's cells have to be
transmitted/re-ceived. 'fast' means fast channel
channel fast|interleaved
and 'inter' means interleaved channel.
Type : Optional
Default Value: Interleaved

Example $ create atm vc intf ifname aal5-0 lowif atm-0 vpi 10 vci 10
enable aal5 pvc a5txsize 1536 a5rxsize 1536 llcmux mgmtmode
data

Output Verbose Mode On

Entry Created Low IfName : atm-0

VC IfName : aal5-0 VCI : 10
VPI : 10 Oper Status : Up
Admin Status : Up
Aal5 Tx Size : 1536 Aal5 Rx Size : 1536
AAL Type : AAL5 AAL5 Encap : LLC Mux
channel : Interleaved Last Change :
18/06/2002::09:10:23
MgmtMode : Data Row Status : active
VC Type : PVC VC Topology : Point to Point

Output Fields
FIELD Description
VC IfName VC Interface Name. It can be : aal5-0 - *
Interface Index of the ATM port, on which this VC is
Low IfName
getting configured.
VPI It is the Virtual Path Identifier.
VCI It is the Virtual Circuit Identifier.
The actual/current state of the interface. It can be
Oper Status
either Up or Down
The desired state of the interface. It may be either
Admin Status
Up/Down.
This specifies the transmit CPCS SDU size to be
Aal5 Tx Size
used.
This specifies the receive CPCS SDU size to be
Aal5 Rx Size
used.
This specifies the AAL type in use for this VC. The
Aal Type only type of AAL supported in Columbia Packet is
AAL5.
This specifies the data multiplexing method to be
Aal5 Encap
used on the VC.
This extension specifies the type of channel, on
which the ATM VC's cells have to be
channel
transmitted/received. ‘fast (1)' means fast channel
and 'inter(2)' means interleaved channel.
The value of sysUpTime at the time this VC entered
Last Change
its current operational state.
It denotes the Management Mode of the ATM VC. If
it is Data, then only data transmission can take
place. If it is Mgmt, then management of remote
CPE device can happen on that ATM VC and pack-
MgmtMode ets on that ATM VC shall start coming to Control
Plane. In DataAndMgmt mode, data transmission
as well as remote CPE management can happen
on the same ATM VC interface. In DataAndMgmt
mode, the only acceptable value for

86
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM
atmVCCAAL5EncapType is llc. In Mgmt mode, EoA
interface cannot be created on the ATM VC and
both Ethernet as well as non-ethernet packets on
that ATM VC shall be received at the Control Plane.
In DataAndMgmt mode, if EoA is created, then only
non-ethernet packets on that ATM VC shall be re-
ceived at the Control Plane. However, if EoA is not
created then all the packets on that ATM VC shall
be received at the Control Plane. However, to
configure ATM VC in DataAndMgmt mode, a good
practice is to to create ATM VC in disable mode till
EoA is created on it, to prevent flooding at Control
Plane. In order to run STP, the mode has to be
DataAndMgmt. If the mode is RawATM(4), ATM
cells are given to Control Plane. In this mode, EoA
interface can ot be created on the ATM VC. If EoA
interface is already created on the ATM VC, its
mode cannot be changed to either Mgmt(2) or
RawATM(4).
RowStatus This defines the row-status of the interface entry
VC Type This field specifies whether VC type is PVC or SVC.
This field specifies the VC connection topology
VC Topology
type.

Caution The specified lower interface should exist. Please refer to the
create atm port command.

References • ATM interface commands

. • ATM statistics commands
. • ATM OAM commands
. • ATM VC statistics commands.

5.5.4 AAL5 VC Statistics Commands

get atm aal5 stats

Description: Use this command to get AAL5 VC statistics.
Command Syntax: get atm aal5 stats [ifname interface-name]

Parameters
Name Description
ifname This parameter specifies the interface for which information
interface-name is desired
Type: Get -Optional
Valid values : aal5-0 - *

Example $ get atm aal5 stats ifname aal5-0

Output Low IfName : atm-0 VC IfName : aal5-0

VPI : 0 VCI : 1
Tx Frames count : 100 Rx Frames count : 85
Tx Bytes count : 1535 Rx Bytes count : 1200
CRC Errors count : 0 Oversized SDU : 0

Output Fields
FIELD Description
VC IfName The name of the aal5 (aal5-0 etc) interface, for

87
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM
which statistics needs to be retrieved.
This specifies the ATM port name. It can be :
Low IfName
atm-0
VPI This is the Virtual Port Identifier.
VCI This is the Virtual Circuit Identifier.
The number of AAL5 CPCS PDUs transmitted
Tx Frames count
on this AAL5 VCC.
The number of AAL5 CPCS PDUs received on
Rx Frames count
this AAL5 VCC.
The number of octets contained in AAL5
Tx Bytes count
CPCS PDUs received on this AAL5 VCC.
The number of octets contained in AAL5
Rx Bytes count
CPCS PDUs received on this AAL5 VCC.
This specifies the number of CRC errors
CRC Errors count
encountered.
This specifies the number of oversized SDUs
Oversized SDU
received.
Caution None.

References • atm vc related commands

. • atm port and statistics related commands
• atm vc statistics commands.

5.5.5 ATM VC Statistics Commands

get atm vc stats

Description: Use this command to get statistical information about a

specific or all ATM virtual circuits.
Command Syntax: get atm vc stats [ifname interface-name]

Parameters
Name Description
ifname interface-name This specifies the Virtual Circuit. If this is not specified,
then information for all VCs is displayed.
Type: Get -Optional
Valid values : aal5-0 - *

Example $ get atm vc stats ifname aal5-0

Output Low IfName : atm-0 VC IfName : aal5-0

VPI : 1 VCI : 1
Total Tx Cells count : 250 Total Rx Cells count : 20
CLPI 0 Rx Cells count : 10 Rx Pkts Rejected count : 0

Output Fields
FIELD Description
LowIf This specifies the ATM port name. It can be : atm-0
VPI It is the Virtual Port Identifier.
VCI It is the Virtual Circuit Identifier.
The name of the aal5 (aal5-0 etc) interface, for
VC IfName
which statistics needs to be retrieved.
Total Tx Cells count The total number of valid ATM cells transmitted by

88
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM
this interface.
The total number of valid ATM cells received by this
Total Rx Cells count
interface.
The number of valid ATM cells received by this in-
CLPI 0 Rx Cells
terface with CLP=0.
Rx Pkts Rejected count The total number of valid ATM cells discarded by
the interface.

Caution None

References • Other atm vc related commands

• oam lpbk command
• atm port related commands

5.5.6 Ethernet Commands

create ethernet intf

Description: Use this command to create a physical Ethernet
interface.
Command Syntax: create ethernet intf ifname interface-name [ip
ip-address][mask net-mask][usedhcp true|false]
[speed{auto|100BT|1000BT}] [type
uplink|downlink][enable | disable][pkttype
Mcast|Bcast|UnknownUcast|All|None]
[orldecvalue][duplex half| full|auto][mgmtvlanid
mgmtvlanid] [priority priority]

delete ethernet intf

Description: Use this command to delete a physical Ethernet
interface.
Command Syntax: delete ethernet intf ifname interface-name

get ethernet intf

Description: Use this command to get information about a particular
physical Ethernet interface, or about all the interfaces.
Command Syntax: get ethernet intf [ifname interface-name]

Modify ethernet intf

Description: Use this command to modify physical Ethernet interface
configuration.
Command Syntax: modify ethernet intf ifname interface-name [enable |
disable][pkttype
Mcast|Bcast|UnknownUcast|All|None] [ip
ip-address][mask net-mask][usedhcp
true|false][speed{auto|100BT|1000BT}] [orl decvalue]
[duplex half|full|auto] [mgmtvlanid mgmtvlanid]
[priority priority]

89
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM
Parameters
Name Description
This specifies the interface index used for the
Ethernet type of interfaces.
Type : Create – Mandatory
ifname interface-name Delete – Mandatory
Get – Optional
Modify – Mandatory
Valid values : eth-0 - *
This specifies the network mask configured for the
interface. This is given in conjunction with IP Ad-
dress configured and shall be given only if IP ad-
dress has been given. This shall be removed
whenever IP Address is removed. Modify of
network mask for an Ethernet interface shall be
supported only if some IP address is configured on
the interface or 'UseDhcp' was configured to
ip ip-address "GS_TRUE" previously. If Usedhcp is GS_TRUE
and modify is done for this field then Usedhcp field
shall be set to GS_FALSE. Both Usedhcp and this
field shall not be specified together
Type : Create - Optional.
Modify - Optional
Valid Values: Any valid class A/B/C / Classless IP
address.
Default Value: None
This specifies the network mask configured for the
interface. This is given in conjunction with IP Ad-
dress configured and shall be given only if IP ad-
dress has been specified. This shall be removed
whenever IP Address is removed. Modifying net-
work mask for an Ethernet interface shall be sup-
ported only if some IP address is configured on the
interface or 'etherUseDhcp' was configured to
Mask net-mask "GS_TRUE" previously. If Usedhcp is GS_TRUE
and modify is done for this field then Usedhcp field
shall be set to GS_FALSE. Both Usedhcp and this
field shall not be specified together.
Type: This field is not allowed when a physical in-
terface is specified and IP is 0.0.0.0. In all other
cases the field is mandatory.
Valid Values : 255.0.0.0 - 255.255.255.255
Default Value: None
This specifies whether a DHCP client is to be trig-
gered to obtain an IP address for this interface. If
this is configured as GS_FALSE and IP address is
not configured, then management IP traffic will not
flow through the interface. If an IP address is
configured and modify is done for this field, then IP
usedhcp true | false address and net mask fields shall be set to Zero
(0.0.0.0). Both Usedhcp and IP address shall not
be specified together. If Iftype is slave then this
field cannot be set to GS_TRUE.
Type : Optional
Valid value : true or false
Default value: false
This specifies the port speed for the net side inter-
faces. Auto specifies that the interface will
speed {auto |100 BT| deter-mine the line speed using auto-negotiation.
1000BT}+ Type: Optional.
Valid Values: auto, 100BT, 1000BT. Default
Value: auto.

90
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM
This specifies the type of the Ethernet interfaces.
The uplink is towards the NET side (2 at most) and
downlink is towards the physical interface connect-
ed to the slave device. For uplink type, ip address
type uplink|downink
not be null, if usedhcp is false.
Type: Optional.
Valid Values: uplink, downlink.
Default Value: uplink.
Administrative status of the Ethernet interface.
Type : Modify - Mandatory
enable|disable
Valid values : enable or disable
Default value: enable
This defines the duplex mode to be used.
Type : optional
Duplex auto|half|full
Valid values: auto, half, full
Default value: auto
This defines the packet type supported by the
interface. etherPktTypeSupported shall be
configured for every Ethernet interface. By default,
Pkttype all packets will be transmitted. The interface shall
Mcast|Bcast|UnknownUcast not transmit any other packet type than configured.
| All|None Type: Create - optional
Modify - optional
Valid values : Mcast, Ucast, UnknownUcast, All
Default Value: All
This parameter specifies the output rate limiting
val-ue to be applied on this Interface. The unit for
the same is in Mbits/sec.
Type: Create - Optional Modify – Optional
Orl decvalue Valid Values:
GS_CFG_MIN_ORL_ETH_RATE_MBPS
-GS_CFG_MAX_ORL_ETH_RATE_MBPS
Default Value:
GS_CFG_DEF_ORL_ETH_RATE_MBPS
VLAN for management traffic on this interface.
Nonzero value of this field is valid only if either 'ip'
field is non-zero or 'usedhcp' field is true. If no
Management Vlanid is specified (in the create
operation) or it's value is set to zero (either in
create or modify operation) then the system shall
use the value of 'portvlanid' associated with the
bridge port created on this interface as the
mgmtvlanid mgmtvlanid Management Vlan Index. In case the management
vlan (i.e. 'mgmtvlanid' or the associated 'portvlanid',
if 'mgmtvlanid' is zero) does not exist on the system
then IP based management on this management
VLAN shall not happen on the interface till the
corresponding VLAN is created with the Net side
port as its member.
Type : Create - optional Modify - optional
Valid values: 0 -GS_CFG_MAX_VLAN_ID
Priority to be set in Tagged Ethernet PDUs sent on
Management VLAN over this interface. This field is
valid only if either 'ip' field is non-zero or 'usedhcp'
priority priority
field is true.
Type: Create - optional Modify - optional
Valid values: 0 -GS_CFG_MAX_MGMT_PRIO

Example1 basic configuration

create ethernet intf ifname eth-0 ip 192.168.1.1
mask255.255.255.0 enable

Example2 advanced configuration

create ethernet intf ifname eth-0 ip 192.168.1.1
mask255.255.255.0 speed 100bt class0thrshld 1 class1thrshld

91
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM
2class2thrshld 1 class3thrshld 2 class4thrshld 1
class5thrshld2 class6thrshld 1 class7thrshld 2 profilename
sprofilemgmtvlanid 2 priority 2

Output Verbose Mode On

Entry Created

Interface : eth-0
Type : Uplink UseDhcp : False
IP Address : 192.168.1.1 Mask : 255.255.0.0
Pkt Type : Mcast
Orl(mbps) : 100
Configured Duplex : Auto Duplex : None
Configured Speed : Auto
Class0thrshld : 1 Class1thrshld : 2
Class2thrshld : 1 Class3thrshld : 2
Class4thrshld : 1 Class5thrshld : 2
Class6thrshld : 1 Class7thrshld : 2
Profile Name : SPPROFILE
Mgmt VLAN Index : 2
Tagged Mgmt PDU Prio: 2
Speed : -
Operational Status : Down Admin Status : Up

Output Fields
FIELD Description
If-Name The name of the interface, which has been created.
Type The type of Ethernet interface - uplink or downlink.
This specifies whether a DHCP client is to be
triggered to obtain an IP address for this interface. If
this is configured as GS_FALSE and etherIfIpAd
dress is not configured, then management IP traffic
will not flow through the interface. If an IP address
UseDhcp
is configured and modify is done for this field then
tEtherIfIpAddress and tAggrIfNetMask field shall be
set to Zero (0.0.0.0). Both Usedhcp and tEtherIf Ip
Address shall not be specified together. If Iftype is
slave then this field cannot be set to GS_TRUE.
This specifies the network mask configured for the
interface. This is given in conjunction with IP
Address configured and shall be given only if IP
address has been given. This shall be removed
whenever IP Address is removed. Modify of
network mask for an Ethernet interface shall be
Ip Address
supported only if some IP address is configured on
the interface or 'UseDhcp' was configured to
"GS_TRUE" previously. If Usedhcp is GS_TRUE
and modify is done for this field then Usedhcp field
shall be set to GS_FALSE. Both Usedhcp and this
field shall not be specified together
This specifies the network mask configured for the
interface. This is given in conjunction with IP
Address configured and shall be given only if IP
address has been given. This shall be removed
whenever IP Address is removed.Modify of network
mask for an Ethernet interface shall be supported
Mask
only if some IP address is configured on the
interface or 'etherUseDhcp' was configured to
"GS_TRUE" previously. If Usedhcp is GS_TRUE
and modify is done for this field then Usedhcp field
shall be set to GS_FALSE. Both Usedhcp and this
field shall not be specified together.
This defines the packet type supported by the
interface. etherPktTypeSupported shall be
pkttype
configured for every Ethernet interface. By default,
all packets will be transmitted. The interface shall

92
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM
not transmit any other packet type than configured.
This parameter specifies the output rate limiting
Orl value to be applied on this Interface.The units for
the same is in Mbits/sec
The duplex mode to be used by the interface, as
Configured Duplex
configured by the user.

Duplex The duplex mode used by the interface.

Configured Speed The configured speed of the interface.
VLAN for management traffic on this interface.
Nonzero value of this field is valid only if either 'ip'
field is non-zero or 'usedhcp' field is true. If no
Management Vlanid is specified (in the create
operation) or it's value is set to zero (either in create
or modify operation) then the system shall use the
value of 'portvlanid' associated with the bridge port
Mgmt VLAN Index created on this interface as the Management Vlan
Index. In case the management vlan (i.e.
'mgmtvlanid' or the associated 'portvlanid', if
'mgmtvlanid' is zero) does not exist on the system
then IP based management on this management
VLAN shall not happen on the interface till the
corresponding VLAN is created with the Net side
port as its member.
Priority to be set in Tagged Ethernet PDUs sent on
Tagged Mgmt PDU Management VLAN over this interface. This field is
Prio valid only if either 'ip' field is non-zero or 'usedhcp'
field is true.
Speed The actual speed of the interface.
Operational Status The operational status of the interface.
Admin Status The administrative status of the interface.

5.5.7 EOA Commands

create eoa intf

Description: Use this command to create an EoA interface towards the
CPE side.
Command Syntax: create eoa intf ifname interface-name lowif
low-interfacename[pkttype {multicast |broadcast
|unknown-unicast}+ | all][fcs false |
true][enable|disable]

delete eoa intf

Description: Use this command to delete an EoA interface.
Command Syntax: delete eoa intf ifname interface-name

get eoa intf

Description: Use this command to get information on a particular EoA
interface, or on all the EoAinterfaces.
Command Syntax: get eoa intf [ifname interface-name]

modify eoa intf

.Description: Use this command to modify the properties of an eoa

93
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM
interface.
Command Syntax: modify eoa intf ifname interface-name [pkttype
{multicast|broadcast |unknown-unicast}+ | all| none]
[fcs false |true][enable|disable]

Parameters
Name Description
This parameter specifies the name assigned to this interface.
Type : Create – Mandatory
Delete – Mandatory
ifname interface-name
Get – Optional
Modify – Mandatory
Valid values: eoa-0,eoa-1….
This parameter specifies the lower interface of an EoA
lowif interface.
low-interface-name Type : Mandatory
Valid Values : aal5-0 - *
This defines the packet type supported by the interface.
EoAPktTypeSupported shall be configured for every CPE-side
Ethernet interface. By default, the option taken is 'ALL' and it
pkttype means that all packets will be transmitted. The value 'None'
{multicast|broadcast means that normal UCast packets will be transmitted. The
|unknownunicast}+| interface shall not transmit any other packet type than
all|none configured.
Type: Optional.
Valid Values : {multicast |broadcast |unknown-unicast}+| all
Default Value : all.
This specifies whether Ethernet FCS needs to be computed.
Currently only false is supported.
fcs false | true Type : Optional
Valid Values : false or true
Default Value: false.
Administrative status of the interface
Type : Optional
Enable|disable
Valid values : enable or disable
Default Values: enable

Example $create eoa intf ifname eoa-0 lowif aal5-0 enable fcs false

Output Verbose Mode On

Entry Created

IfName : eoa-0 LowIfName : aal5-0

FCS : False
Pkt Type : ALL
Oper Status : Down Admin Status :
Up

Output Fields
Name Description
IfName The name of the interface that has been created.
LowIfName Specifies the lower interface.
FCS Whether FCS is true or false.
This defines the packet type supported by the inter-
face. EoAPktTypeSupported shall be configured for
every CPE-side Ethernet interface. By default, the
Pkt Type option taken is 'ALL' and it means that all packets
will be transmitted. The value 'None' means that
normal UCast packets will be transmitted. The
interface shall not transmit any other packet type

94
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM
than that configured.
The desired state of the interface. It may be either
Admin Status
Up or Down
The actual/current state of the interface. It can be
Oper Status
either up or down.

Caution None

References • Ethernet commands

• Ethernet Stats commands.

5.5.8 GVRP Port Info Commands

get gvrp port info

Description: Use this command to get.
Command Syntax: get gvrp port info [ portid portid ]

modify gvrp port info

Description:
Use this command to modify.
Command Syntax: modify gvrp port info portid portid [ portvlanid portvlanid ]
[ acceptframetypes all | tagged ] [ ingressfiltering true|false ]
[ gvrpstatus enable | disable ] [ restrictedvlanreg true|false ]

Parameter
Name Description
The bridge port id.
portid portid Type :Optional for all commands
Valid values: 1 -GS_CFG_MAX_BRIDGE_PORTS
The VLAN Identifier.
portvlanid portvlanid Type :Optional for all commands
Valid values: 1 - GS_CFG_MAX_VLANID
When this is Tagged, the device will discard
un-tagged frames or Priority-Tagged frames
received on this port. When this is All, untagged
acceptframetypes all | tagged frames or Priority-Tagged frames received on this
port will be accepted and assigned to the PVID for
this port.
Type:Optional for all commands
When this is true, the device will discard incoming
frames for VLANs, which do not include this Port in
its Member set. When false, the port will accept
ingressfiltering true|false
all incoming frames.
Type : Optional for all commands
Valid values: true or false
The state of GVRP operation on this port.
gvrpstatus enable | disable
Type:Optional for all commands
The state of Restricted VLAN Registration on this
port. If the value of this control is true(1), then cre-
restrictedvlanreg ation of a new dynamic VLAN entry is permitted
restrictedvlanregtrue|fa lse only if there is a Static VLAN Registration Entry for
the VLAN concerned, in which, the Registrar
Administrative Control value for this port is, Normal

95
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM
Registration.
Type :Optional for all commands
Valid values: true or false

Example $ get gvrp port info

Output Verbose Mode On:

Output Fields
Field Description
Port Id The bridge port id.
Port VLAN Index The VLAN Identifier.
When this is Tagged, the device will discard
un-tagged frames or Priority-Tagged frames
Accept Frame Types received on this port. When All, untagged frames or
Priority-Tagged frames received on this port will be
accepted and assigned to the PVID for this port.
When this is true, the device will discard incoming
frames for VLANs, which do not include this Port in
Ingress Filtering
its Member set. When false, the port will accept
all incoming frames.
Gvrp Status The state of GVRP operation on this port.
The total number of failed GVRP registrations, for
Failed Registrations
any reason, on this port.
The Source MAC Address of the last GVRP
Last Pdu Origin
message received on this port.
The state of Restricted VLAN Registration on this
port. If the value of this control is true(1), then
creation of a new dynamic VLAN entry is permitted
Restricted Vlan
only if there is a Static VLAN Registration Entry for
Registration
the VLAN concerned, in which, the Registrar
Administrative Control value for this port is, Normal
Registration.

Caution None
References • GVRP Commands

5.5.9 VLAN Static Commands

create vlan static

Description: Use this command to create.
Command Syntax: create vlan static vlanname vlanname vlanid vlanid
[egressports egressports|none ][ forbidegressports
forbidegressports|none ] [ untaggedports
untaggedports|none ][ bridgingmode bridgingmode]
[floodsupport enable|disable][bcastsupport
enable|disable]

96
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM

modify vlan static

Description: Use this command to modify.
Command Syntax: modify vlan static ( vlanname vlanname | vlanid
vlanid )[egressports egressports|none ]
[forbidegressportsforbidegressports|none ]
[ untaggedports untaggedports|none ][ bridgingmode
bridgingmode] [floodsupport
enable|disable][bcastsupport enable|disable]

delete vlan static

Description: Use this command to delete.
Command Syntax: delete vlan static ( vlanname vlanname | vlanid
vlanid )get vlan static

get vlan static

Description: Use this command to delete.
Command Syntax: get vlan static [ vlanname vlanname | vlanid vlanid ]

5.5.10 Vlan curr info Commands

get vlan curr info

Description: Use this command to get.
Command Syntax: get vlan curr info [ vlanid vlanid ]

Parameters
Name Description
The VLAN identifier
vlanid vlanid Type: Get --Optional
Valid values: 1 - GS_CFG_MAX_VLAN_ID

Example $ get vlan curr info vlanid 45

Output VLAN Index : 45

VLAN Status :1
Egress Ports : 24
Untagged Ports : 24
Bridging Mode : Residential
Flood support Status : enable
Broadcast support Status : enable

Output field description

Field Description
VLAN Index The VLAN identifier
This value indicates the status of the VLAN Port
cor-responding to this entry. other(1) - the entry is
for the default VLAN created for the system.
VLAN Status permanent(2) - this entry, corresponding to an entry
in dot1qVlanStaticTable, is currently in use and will
re-main so after the next reset of the device. The
port lists for this entry include ports from the

97
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM
equivalent dot1qVlanStaticTable entry and ports
learnt dynam-ically. dynamic (3) - this entry is
currently in use and will remain so until removed by
GVRP. There is no static entry for this VLAN and it
will be removed when the last port leaves the
VLAN.
The set of ports, which are transmitting traffic for
Egress Ports
this VLAN, as either tagged or untagged frames.
The set of ports, which are transmitting traffic for
Untagged Ports
this VLAN as untagged frames.
VLAN Index The VLAN identifier
This value indicates the status of the VLAN Port
corresponding to this entry. other(1) - the entry is
for the default VLAN created for the system.
permanent(2) - this entry, corresponding to an entry
in dot1qVlanStaticTable, is currently in use and will
remain so after the next reset of the device. The
VLAN Status port lists for this entry include ports from the
equivalent dot1qVlanStaticTable entry and ports
learnt dynamically. dynamic(3) - this entry is
currently in use and will remain so until removed by
GVRP. There is no static entry for this VLAN and
it will be removed when the last port leaves the
VLAN.
The set of ports, which are transmitting traffic for
Egress Ports
this VLAN, as either tagged or untagged frames.
The set of ports, which are transmitting traffic for
Untagged Ports
this VLAN as untagged frames.
This specifies the state of full bridging for the Vlan.
There can be 3 values associated with this based
on global fullBridgingStatus. These values can be
restricted bridging, unrestricted full bridging and
resi-dential bridging. The user can specify the
bridging mode for the vlan at the time of VLAN
Bridging Mode
creation or modification as one of these values;
otherwise the vlan inherits the globally set bridging
mode. The bridging modes are defined as
GS_CFG_RSTRCD_BRIDGING,
GS_CFG_UNRSTRCD_BRIDGING and
GS_CFG_RSDNTL_BRIDGING.
This tells if the flooding shall be done for unknown
unicast packets for this vlan or not. The unknown
unicast packets shall be flooded to all ports for a
Flood support Status
vlan if global value (present in Dot1dTpInfo) is
enabled or throttle and the value per vlan is also
enabled else dropped.
This tells if the broadcast shall be done for this vlan
or not. The broadcast packets shall be broadcasted
Broadcast support Status on all ports for a vlan if global value (present in
Dot1dTpInfo) and the value per vlan are both en-
abled else dropped.

Caution None.

References None.

98
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM

5.5.11 VLAN Port Stats Commands

get vlan port stats

Description: Use this command to get.
Command Syntax: get vlan port stats [portid portid] [vlanid vlanid]

reset vlan port stats

Description: Use this command to reset.
Command Syntax: reset vlan port stats portid portid vlanid vlanid

Parameters
Name Description
Index of the Bridge Port
Type : Get – Optional Reset - Mandatory
portid portid
Valid values:
1 -GS_CFG_MAX_BRIDGE_PORTS
The VLAN identifier.
vlanid vlanid Type : Get – Optional Reset - Mandatory
Valid values: 1 - GS_CFG_MAX_VLAN_ID

Output Fields
Field Description
PortId Index of the Bridge Port.
VLAN Index The VLAN identifier.
Vlan In Frames Number of valid frames received by this port.
Vlan Out Frames Number of valid frames transmitted by this port.
Vlan In Discards Number of valid frames discarded by this port.
Vlan In Overflow Count of Inframes counter overflow.
Vlan Out Overflow Count of Outframes counter overflow.

Caution None

References • VLAN Commands.

5.5.12 Transparent Bridging Table Commands

modify bridge tbg info

Description: Use this command to modify.
Command Syntax: modify bridge tbg info [aging aging-timeout ]
[slaveaging aging-timeout][netaging aging-timeout]
[ floodsupport enable | disable | throttle] [bcastsupport
enable | disable] [mcastsupport enable | disable]
[mcastdrop enable | disable][throttlingrate

99
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM
throttlingrate ] [ pollinterval pollinterval]][ dropiffdbfull
dropiffdbfull ] [ resnetlearning resnetlearning ]

get bridge tbg info

Description: Use this command to get bridging related global
information.
Command Syntax: get bridge tbg info

Parameters
Name Description
The timeout period, in seconds, for aging out dynamically
learned forwarding information from CPEs. The value 0 can be
configured when aging is to be stopped.
Aging aging-timeout Type: Modify Optional
Valid values:
GS_CFG_MIN_AGING_TIME –GS_CFG_MAX_AGING
_TIME
The timeout period, in seconds, for aging out dynamically
learned forwarding information learned from the slave device.
slaveaging aging –
The recommended value for this is more than or equal to the
timeout
value for dot1dTpAgingTimeOut. The value 0 can be
configured when aging is to be stopped.
The timeout period, in seconds, for aging out dynamically
learned forwarding information from NET side port. This is
netaging aging – used only for full bridge configuration. The recommended value
timeout of net aging timeout should be greater than that of the ìAgingî
parameter. The value 0 can be configured when aging is to be
stopped.

This is used to specify whether the unknown unicast packets

are to be flooded or not. The value ‘throttle’ specifies that
throttling using the ‘throttling rate’ and ‘polling interval’
floodsupport parameters, configured by the user, shall control the flooding.
enable|disable|throttle The fields ‘throttleRate’ and ‘pollInterval’ are valid only when
the floodsupport is set to ‘throttle’.The value for this is used
along with per vlan configuration for flood support , to de-
termine if flooding has to be done for unknown unicast packet.

This is used to specify whether the broadcasting is supported

bcastsupport or not. The value for this is used along with per vlan
enable|disable configuration broadcast support, to determine if broadcasting
has to be done for the broadcast packet.
Used to specify whether the multicast is supported or not.
mcastsupport
Type : Optional
enable|disable
Valid Values: enable| disable
Used to specify whether the multicast packets are to be
dropped, or to be forwarded, if multicast is not supported. This
mcastdrop
is only valid if dot1dTpMcastSupport is false.
enable|disable
Type : Optional
Valid Values: enable|disable
Defines the throttling Rate i.e. maximum number of
FDB lookup failures resulting in flooding per second, beyond
throttlingrate
which, the flooding shall be throttled in the system. The value
throttlingrate
of this field is valid only if the ìfloodsupportî parameter in the
system is set to value Throttle.

100
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM
This indicates, in milliseconds, the polling interval.
User can modify the polling interval at run time. The polling
pollinterval interval is defined in milliseconds with granularity of 100 ms.
pollinterval This interval allows user to have finer granularity and control
over flooding in the system. The value of this field is valid only
if the floodsupport parameter is set to value Throttle.
This specifies if the frame for which learning could not be done
because of forwarding table limit being reached, is to be
dropped. If this is enabled the frame for which learning could
not be done because of limit exceeded shall be dropped, else
forwarded based on bridge forwarding logic.This being enabled
dropiffdbfull nable| shall reduce flooding, as when a response to such a frame
edisable from whcih learning could not be done shall come the frame
shall be flooded, as the entry for that unicast address, shall not
be found in forwarding table.
Type : Optional
Valid Values: enable or disable
Default value: GS_CFG_DEF_BRIDGE_IFFDBFULLDROP
This specifies if learning can be done over net side port for
residential bridging. Learning shall be done on Net port in case
of vlan with residential bridging if 'dot1dPortGsLearningStatus'
and 'dot1dTpGsResidentialNetLearning'is enabled. In case of
vlan with 'unrestricted' or 'restricted' bridging the learning is
resnetlearning enable governed only by per port configuration i.e.
| disable 'dot1dBasePortTable'. Currently the modification of this
parameter is not supported.
Type : Optional
Valid Values: enable or disable
Default value:
GS_CFG_DEF_NET_LEARNING_RSDNTL

Output Fields
Field Description
The MAC address used by this bridge, when it must be
MacAddress referred to, in a unique fashion. It is the address of one of
the Ethernet ports.
The maximum number of ports that can be controlled by
No. of Ports
this bridge.
Indicates what type of bridging this bridge can perform. It is
Base Type
always Transparent Bridging or STP.
The timeout period, in seconds, for aging out dynamically
Aging TimeOut
learned for warding information from CPEs. The value 0

101
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM
can be configured when aging is to be stopped.
The timeout period, in seconds, for aging out dynamically
learned forwarding information learned from the slave
Slaveaging TimeOut device. The recommended value for this is more than or
equal to the value for dot1dTpAgingTimeOut. The value 0
can be configuredwhen aging is to be stopped.
This is used to specify whether the unknown unicast
packets are to be flooded or not. The value ‘throttle’
specifies that throttling using the ‘throttling rate’ and ‘polling
interval’ parameters, configured by the user, shall control
Floodsupport the flooding. The fields ‘throttleRate’ and ‘pollInterval’ are
valid only when the floodsupport is set to ‘throttle’.The
value for this is used along with per vlan configuration for
flood support , to determine if flooding has to be done for
unknown unicast packet.
This is used to specify whether the broadcasting is
supported or not. The value for this is used along with per
Bcastsupport
vlan configuration broadcast support, to determine if
broadcasting has to be done for the broadcast packet.
Mcastsupport Used to specify whether the multicast is supported or not.
Used to specify whether the multicast packets are to be
Mcastdrop dropped, or to be forwarded, if multicast is not supported.
This is only valid if dot1dTpMcastSupport is false.
The timeout period, in seconds, for aging out dynamically
learned for warding information from NET side port. This is
NetAgingTimeout used only for full bridge configuration. The recommended
value of net aging timeout should be greater than that of
dot1dTpAgingTimeOut.
This specifies the current state of full bridging on the
bridge. The bridge can be set to residential bridging,
restricted full bridging or unrestricted full bridging. In
residential bridging, all packets from a CPE side port are
sent to Net side port without doing a lookup in the
Bridging Mode
forwarding table. In restricted full bridging there is a lookup
and a packet coming from a CPE port destined for another
CPE port is dropped. Hence CPE-CPE switching is not
permitted. In unrestricted full bridging, all traffic is
forwarded based on lookup.
Defines the throttling Rate i.e. maximum number of FDB
lookup failures resulting in flooding per second, beyond
Throttling rate which, the flooding shall be throttled in the system. The
value of this field is valid only if the ìflood supportî
parameter in the system is set to value Throttle.
This indicates, in milliseconds the polling interval. User can
modify the polling interval at run time. The polling interval is
Polling Interval defined in milliseconds with granularity of 100 ms. This
(milliseconds) interval allows user to have finer granularity and control
over flooding in the system. The value of this field is valid
only if the ìfloodsupportî parameter is set to value Throttle.
This specifies if the frame for which learning could not be
done because of forwarding table limit being reached, is to
be dropped. If this is enabled the frame for which learning
could not be done because of limit exceeded shall be
Drop If FDB full status dropped, else forwarded based on bridge forwarding
logic.This being enabled shall reduce flooding, as when a
response to such a frame from whcih learning could not be
done shall come the frame shall be flooded, as the entry for
that unicast address, shall not be found in forwarding table.

102
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM
This specifies if learning can be done over net side port for
residential bridging. Learning shall be done on Net port in
case of vlan with residential bridging if
'dot1dPortGsLearningStatus' and
ResidentialNetLearning 'dot1dTpGsResidentialNetLearning'is enabled. In case of
vlan with 'unrestricted' or 'restricted' bridging the learning is
governed only by per port configuration i.e.
'dot1dBasePortTable'. Currently the modification of this
parameter is not supported.

Caution None

References • Bridge Port commands

• Bridge Port stats commands
• Ethernet commands.

5.5.13 IP Route Table Commands

create ip route
Description: Use this command to create a routing table entry.
Command Syntax: create ip route ip dest-ip-address gwyip
gwy-ip-address mask net-mask

delete ip route
Description: Use this command to create a routing table entry.
Command Syntax: create ip route ip dest-ip-address gwyip
gwy-ip-address mask net-mask

get ip route
Description: Use this command to create a routing table entry.
Command Syntax: create ip route ip dest-ip-address gwyip
gwy-ip-address mask net-mask

5.5.14 IP Net to Media Table Commands

create arp
Description: Use this command to create a static entry in the ARP
Table.
Command Syntax: create arp ip ip-address macaddr mac-address

delete arp
Description: Use this command to delete an entry from the ARP table.
Command Syntax: delete arp ip ip-address

103
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM

get arp
Description: Use this command to display either the full ARP table or a
single entry.
Command Syntax: get arp [ip ip-address]

Parameters
Name Description
IP address corresponding to the media-dependent
ìphysicalî address
ip ip-address
Type: Mandatory
Valid values: Any valid class A/B/C IP address
The media-dependent ìphysicalî address
macaddr mac-address Type: Mandatory
Valid values: 0:0:0:0:0:1 - ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:fe

Output Fields
FIELD Description
This specifies the physical interface for the media. It may
If Name be: eth-0 - *. This entry contains bridge management
information.
Type This defines the type of mapping in use. The value
Invalid has the effect that this entry is not used. It may
be: Static, Dynamic, Other
Mac Address The media-dependent ìphysicalî address
Ip Address IP address corresponding to the media-dependent
ìphysicalî address
Caution The specified interface should pre-exist. Please refer to the create
ethernet intf command.
References
• delete arp command
• get arp command
• create ethernet intf command
• ip route related commands.

5.5.15 Bridge Mode Commands

get bridge mode

Description: Use this command to get the current bridging mode.
Command Syntax: get bridge mode

104
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM

5.5.16 DHCP Client Commands

get dhcp client info

Description: Use this command to get DHCP client information for clients,
on the specified interface, or for all the interfaces.
Command Syntax: get dhcp client info [ifname interface-name]

Parameters
Name Description
This specifies the interface name on which DHCP is
running. If this is not specified, then information for
Ifname interface-namef clients on all such interfaces will be displayed.
Type : Optional
Valid values : eth-*, aggr-*

Output Fields
FIELD Description
This is an interface on which DHCP is running: It can
If-Name
be : eth-*, aggr-*
Server This specifies the address of the DHCP server with
whom the client has obtained the IP address and other
configuratio.s
This specifies the current state of the client. It may be:
Status
Init, Selecting, Bound, Requesting, Renew or Bind.
This signifies the date on which the DHCP server leased
Lease Start Date
out the IP address to the client.

105
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM
Lease Time
This specifies the time period, (in seconds), for which an
IP address was leased out by the server.
The client is expected to renew the lease before the
expiry of this timer or release the IP Address.

Caution None.
References • dhcp client stats related commands

get dhcp client stats

Description: Use this command to get DHCP client statistics on an
interface on which the DHCP client is running, or on all
such interfaces.
Command Syntax: get dhcp client stats [ifname interface-name]

Parameters
FIELD
Ifname interface-name This specifies the interface name on which DHCP is running.
If this is not specified then information for clients on all such
interfaces will be displayed.
Type: Optional
Valid values : eth-0- *

Output Fields

FIELD Description
This is an interface on which DHCP is running: It
If-Name
can be : eth-0
This specifies number of DHCP messages received
Msgs Sent
sent on this interface.
This specifies number of DHCP messages sent
Msgs Rcvd
received on this interface.
This specifies number of DHCP decline messages
Decline Sent
sent on this interface.
This specifies number of DHCP offer messages
Offer Msgs Rcvd
received on this interface.
This specifies number of DHCP discover messages
Discover Msgs Sent
sent on this interface.
This specifies number of DHCP request messages
Req Sent
sent on this interface.
This specifies number of DHCP acks received on
Acks Rcvd
this interface.
This specifies number of DHCP release messages
Rel Sent
sent on this interface.
This specifies number of DHCP nacks received on
Nacks Rcvd
this interface.
This specifies number of DHCP inform messages
Inform Sent
sent on this interface.

106
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM
This specifies number of invalid dhcp messages
Invalid Rcvd
received on this interface.

Caution None
References • dhcp client info related commands

5.5.17 Multicast Forwarding Table Commands

get bridge mcast forwarding

Description: Use this command to get.
Command Syntax: get bridge mcast forwarding [vlanid vlanid]
[macaddressmacaddress]

Parameters
Name Description
vlanid vlanid The VLAN id for this VLAN. In devices supporting
"Shared Vlan for multicast" capability, the informa-
tion for a multicast MAC address is shared across
vlans. Hence vlan id is an optional parameter. In
de-vices supporting "Independent Vlan for
multicast" capability, each vlan can have its own
information for a multicast MAC address. Hence
vlanid is a mandatory parameter in all the
commands other than - get. For No Vlan case, vlan
id is not required.
Type: Optional
Valid values: 0 - GS_CFG_MAX_VLAN_ID
The destination Group MAC address in a frame to
which this entry's filtering information applies. Bit 0
macaddress of the first octet of mac addr indicates a group
macaddress (multicast) mac addr if the bit is SET.Eg
01:00:00:00:00:00, 03: FF: FF: FF: FF.
Type: Optional Valid values:

Output Fields
Field Description
The VLAN id for this VLAN. In devices supporting "Shared Vlan for
mul-ticast" capability, the information for a multicast MAC address is
shared across vlans. Hence vlan id is an optional parameter. In devices
Vlan Index supporting "Independent Vlan for multicast" capability, each vlan can
have its own information for a multicast MAC address. Hence vlanid is
a mandatory parameter in all the commands other than - get. For No
Vlan case, vlan id is not required.
The destination Group MAC address in a frame, to which this entry's
Mac Address
filtering information, applies.
The complete set of bridge ports, in this VLAN, to which frames
destined for this Group MAC address are currently being explicitly
Egress Ports
forwarded. This does not include ports for which this address is only
implicitly forwarded, in the dot1qForwardAllPorts list.
The subset of bridge ports in EgressPorts, which were learned by
Group Learnt
GMRP or some other dynamic mechanism, in this Filtering database.

107
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM

Caution None
References • bridge static multicast

5.5.18 Bridge Static Unicast Commands

create bridge static ucast

Description: This command is used to create.
Command Syntax: create bridge static ucast [vlanid vlanid] ucastaddr
ucastaddr [portid portid]

delete bridge static ucast

Description: This command is used to delete.
Command Syntax: delete bridge static ucast [vlanid vlanid] ucastaddr
ucastaddr

get bridge static ucast

Description: This command is used to get.
Command Syntax: get bridge static ucast [ vlanid vlanid ] [ ucastaddr
ucastaddr ]

modify bridge static ucast

Description: This command is used to modify.

Command Syntax: modify bridge static ucast [vlanid vlanid]
ucastaddrucastaddr [ portid portid ]

Parameter
Name Description
The VLAN id for this VLAN. . For No Vlan case, vlan
id is not required.
vlanid vlanid
Type : Optional
Valid values: 1-GS_CFG_MAX_VLAN_ID
The Destination unicast Mac Address, to which
filtering info applies
ucastaddr ucastaddr
Type: Mandatory
Valid values:
Type : Optional
portid portid
Valid values: 1- GS_CFG_MAX_BRIDGE_PORT

5.5.19 Bridge Static Multicast Commands

create bridge static mcast

Description: Use this command is used to create.
Command Syntax: create bridge static mcast [vlanid vlanid] mcastaddr
mcastaddr [ egressports egressports ]
[ forbidegressports forbidegressports ]

108
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM

delete bridge static mcast

Description: Use this command is used to delete.
Command Syntax: delete bridge static mcast [vlanid vlanid] mcastaddr
mcastaddr

get bridge static mcast

Description: Use this command is used to get.
Command Syntax: get bridge static mcast [ vlanid vlanid ] [ mcastaddr
mcastaddr ]

modify bridge static mcast

Description: Use this command is used to modify
Command Syntax: modify bridge static mcast [vlanid vlanid] mcastaddr
mcastaddr [ egressports egressports ]
[ forbidegressports forbidegressports ]

Parameter
Name Description
The VLAN id for this VLAN. In devices supporting
"Shared Vlan for multicast" capability, the information
for a multicast MAC address is shared across vlans.
Hence vlan id is an optional parameter. In de-vices
supporting "Independent Vlan for multicast" capability,
each vlan can have its own information for a multicast
Vlanid vlanid
MAC address. Hence vlanid is a mandatory parameter
in all the commands other than - get. For No Vlan case,
vlan id is not required.
Type :Optional for all commands
Valid values: 0 - GS_CFG_MAX_VLAN_ID
Default value:
The destination multicast MAC address in a frame, to
which this entry's filtering information applies. Bit 0 of
the first octet of the MAC address indicates a group
(multicast) MAC address, if the bit is SET. For example,
01:00:00:00:00:00,03:FF:FF:FF:FF. Addresses in the
range 01:80:C2:00:00:00 - 01:80:C2:00:00:0f and
mcastaddr 01:80:C2:00:00:20 - 01:80:C2:00:00:2f have been
mcastaddr blocked as value of this index, as these are reserved
GARP addresses.
Type : Create -- Mandatory
Modify --Mandatory
Delete -- Mandatory
Get - Optional
Default value:
The set of ports, to which frames received from a
specific port and destined for a specific Multicast MAC
address must be forwarded. A port may not be added in
this set, if it is already a member of the set of ports in
egressports
ForbidEgressPorts. More than one val-ue can be
egressports|none
given, separated by spaces.
Type :Optional for all commands
Valid values: 1 – GS_CFG_MAX_BRIDGE_PORTS
Default value: none

109
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM
The set of ports, to which frames received from a
specific port and destined for a specific Multicast
MACaddress must not be forwarded, regardless of any
forbidegressports dynamic information. A port may not be added in this
forbidegressports| set if it is already a member of the set of ports in
none EgressPorts.
Type :Optional for all commands
Valid values : 1 – GS_CFG_MAX_BRIDGE_PORTS
Default value: none

Example $ create bridge static mcast vlanid 7

mcastaddr 01:00:5e:00:00:01 egressports 10
forbidegressports 20

Output Verbose Mode On:

Output Fields
Field Description
The VLAN id for this VLAN. In devices supporting
"Shared Vlan for multicast" capability, the informa-
tion for a multicast MAC address is shared across
vlans. Hence vlan id is an optional parameter. In
de-vices supporting "Independent Vlan for
VLan Index
multicast" capability, each vlan can have its own
information for a multicast MAC address. Hence
vlanid is a mandatory parameter in all the
commands other than - get. For No Vlan case, vlan
id is not required.
The destination multicastcast MAC address in a
Mcast Address frame, to which the filtering information of this entry
applies.
The set of ports, to which frames received from a
specific port and destined for a specific Multicast
Egress ports MAC address must be forwarded. A port may not
be added in this set if it is already a member of the
set of ports in ForbiddenEgressPorts.
The set of ports, to which frames received from a
specific port and destined for a specific Multicast
Forbidden MAC address must not be forwarded, regardless of
Egress ports any dynamic information. A port may not be
added in this set if it is already a member of the set
of ports in EgressPorts.

Caution None

110
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM

5.5.20 Bridge mcast fwdunreg commands

get bridge mcast fwdunreg

Description: Use this command to get.
Command Syntax: get bridge mcast fwdunreg [ vlanid vlanid ]

modify bridge mcast fwdunreg

Description: Use this command to create.
Command Syntax: modify bridge mcast fwdunreg vlanid vlanid [egressports
egressports|none][forbidegressports forbidegressports
|none]

Parameters
Name Description
vlanid vlanid The VLAN id for this VLAN. In devices supporting "Shared
Vlan for multicast" capability, the information for a
multicast MAC address is shared across VLANs. Hence,
VLAN id is an optional parameter. In devices supporting
"Independent Vlan for multicast" capability, each VLAN
can have its own information for a multicast MAC address.
Hence, VLAN id is a mandatory parameter in all the
commands other than - get. For No Vlan case, vlan id is
not required.
Type ：Modify – Optional
Get -- Optional
Valid values ：0 - GS_CFG_MAX_VLAN_ID
Default value :
Egressports The set of ports configured by management,in this VLAN,
egressports|none to which multicast group-addressed frames for which
there is no more specific forwarding information, are to be
forwarded. More than one value can begiven, separated
by spaces.
Type : Modify -- Optional
Valid values: 1-386
The setofports configured bymanagementin this VLAN for
which the Service Requirement attribute Forward
forbidegressports Unregistered Multicast Groups may not be dynamically
forbidegressports registered by GMRP. More than one value can be given
|none separated by spaces.
Type : Modify -- Optional
Valid values: 1-386

Example $ modify bridge mcast fwdunreg vlanid 1

egressports 34 forbidegressports 345

Output Verbose Mode On

111
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM

Output Fields
Field Description
The VLAN id for this VLAN. In devices supporting
"Shared Vlan for multicast" capability, the information
for a multicast MAC address is shared across VLANs.
Hence, VLAN id is an optional parameter. In devices
VLAN Index supporting "Independent Vlan for multicast" capability,
each VLAN can have its own information for a
multicast MAC address. Hence, VLAN id is a
mandatory parameter in all the commands other than -
get. For No Vlan case, vlan id is not required
The complete set of ports in this VLAN, to which
multicast group-addressed frames for which there is
Forward no more specific forwarding information, will be
Unregistered Ports forwarded. This includes ports, for which this need has
been determined dynamically by GMRP, or configured
statically by management.
The set of ports, configured by management, in this
Forward VLAN, to which multicast group-addressed frames for
Unregistered Static which there is no more specific forwarding information,
Ports are to be forwarded. More than one value can be
given, separated by spaces.
The set of ports, configured by management in this
Forward VLAN, for which the Service Requirement attribute
Unregistered Forward Unregistered Multicast Groups, may not
Forbidden Ports be dynamically registered by GMRP. More than one
value can be given, separated by spaces.

Caution None

5.5.21 ridge tbg traps Commands

get bridge tbg traps

Description: Use this command to get.
Command Syntax: get bridge tbg traps

112
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM

modify bridge tbg traps

Description: Use this command to modify.
Command Syntax: modify bridge tbg traps [ bindingstatus enable | disable ]

Parameters
Name Description
bindingstatus enable |disable This allows the user to enable or disable the
generation of 'binding status changed' trap.
Type: Modify ---Optional

Example $ get bridge tbg traps

Output Binding Status Changed Trap : enable

Output Fields

FIELD Description
Binding Status Changed This allows the user to enable or disable the
Trap generation of 'binding status changed' trap.

Caution None

5.5.22 Bridge Port Table Commands

create bridge port intf

Description: Use this command to create a new bridge port.
Command Syntax: create bridge port intf portid portid [maxucast
max-ucast-addresses ] [learning enable|disable][status
enable|disable] [stickystatus enable | disable]
[ aclglbdenyapply Enable | Disable ] [ aclglbtrackapply
Enable | Disable ]

delete bridge port intf

Description: This command is used to delete an existing bridge port.
Command Syntax: delete bridge port intf portid portid

get bridge port intf

Description: Use this command to get the information about a specific
bridge port or for all the ports.
Command Syntax: get bridge port intf [ portid portid ]

modify bridge port intf

Description: Use this command to modify bridge port extension attributes

113
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM
Command Syntax: modify bridge port intf portid portid [maxucast
max-ucast-addresses ] [learning enable|disable][status
enable|disable] [stickystatus enable |
disable][ aclglbdenyapply Enable |
Disable ][ aclglbtrackapply Enable | Disable ]

Parameters
Name Description
The bridge port id
Type: Create --Optional
Delete --Mandatory
portid portid
Modify --Mandatory
Get -- Optional
Valid values: 1 -GS_CFG_MAX_BRIDGE_PORTS
The interface name associated with the given port.
Ifname <name> Type : Create --Mandatory
Valid values: 1 -GS_CFG_MAX_BRIDGE_PORTS
This specifies the maximum number of unicast addresses,
which can be learned from this port. This can be modified
when the admin status of bridge port is disabled. Max of
number of unicast entries that can be learned/configured
on a bridge port on CPE side is
GS_CFG_MAX_NUM_CPE_PORT_UCAST_MAC
_ENTRIES. The default value for number of unicast
entries that can be learned or configured on a bridge port
is GS_CFG_DEF_NUM_CPE_PORT_UCAST_MAC
_ENTRIES. Max of number of unicast entries that can be
learned/configured on a bridge port on NET side is
GS_CFG_MAX_NUM_NET_PORT_UCAST_MAC
maxucast
_ENTRIES. The default value for number of unicast
max-ucast-addresses
entries that can be learned or configured on a bridge port
is GS_CFG_DEF_NUM_NET_PORT_UCAST_MAC_
ENTRIES. Max of number of unicast entries that can be
learned/configured on a bridge port on downlink side is
GS_CFG_MAX_NUM_DNLINK_PORT_UCAST_M
AC_ENTRIES. The default value for number of unicast
entries that can be learned or configured on a bridge port
is GS_CFG_DEF_NUM_DNLINK_PORT_UCAST_M
AC_ENTRIES.
Type : Create -- Optional
Modify -- Optional
Default value: 256
The State of Learning on this bridge port. The value
enable (1) indicates that unicast Mac address learning is
enabled and the value disable indicates that unicast Mac
address learning is disabled on this bridge port. The
default value of learning status for CPE/Downlink side
bridge ports shall be
learning
GS_CFG_DEF_PORT_LEARNING_STATUS and for NET
enable|disable
side bridge port default value shall be
GS_CFG_DEF_NET_PORT_LEARNING_STATUS
Type : Create --Optional
Modify -- Optional
Valid Values: enable or disable
Default value: Enable
The desired state of the bridge port. On creation, the
bridge port shall be created in enabled AdminStatus by
status enable|disable
default.
Type : Create --Optional

114
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM
Modify -- Optional
Valid Values: enable or disable
Default value: disable

Indicates if the port has been set as sticky. The value

enable (1) indicates that the entries learnt on this port will
not be aged out. It also indicates that the entries learnt on
this port shall not be learnt on any other port. The entries
learnt on this port can only be removed by management
stickystatus enable |
action or by making the value as disable (2) so that the
disable
entries can be aged out.
Type : Create --Optional
Modify -- Optional
Valid Values: enable or disable
Default value: enable
This specifies whether the global acl macentry deny list
represented by MO AclGlobalMacList is to be applied to
this port or not. The default value of this parameter shall
depend on the port type. For Net side ports, the default
aclglbdenyapply
value shall be
Enable | Disable
GS_CFG_DEF_NET_PORT_ACL_GLB_DENY_S TATUS
and for the cpe side ports the default value shall be
GS_CFG_DEF_CPE_PORT_ACL_GLB_DENY_STATUS.
Type: Modify --Optional
This specifies whether the global acl macentry track list
represented by MO AclGlobalMacList is to be applied to
this port or not. The default value of this parameter shall
depend on the port type. For Net side ports, the default
aclglbtrackapply
value shall be GS_CFG_DEF_NET_PORT_ACL_GLB
Enable | Disable
_TRACK_STATUS and for the cpe side ports the default
value shall be GS_CFG_DEF_CPE_PORT_ACL_GLB_
TRACK_STATUS.
Type: Modify --Optional

Example $ create bridge port intf ifname eth-0 portid 10 maxucast 200
learning enable stickystatus enable enable aclglbdenyapply
Disable aclglbtrackapply Disable

Output Entry Created

Set Done
Port Id : 10 IfName :
eth-0
Max Unicast Addresses : 200 Learning Status :
Enable
Port Oper Status : Disable Port Admin Status :
Disable
Sticky Status : Enable FDB Modify :
Disable
Acl Global Deny Apply : Disable
Acl Global Track Apply : Disable

Output Fields
FIELD Description
Port Id The bridge port identifier
If Name The interface name associated with the given port.

115
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM
This specifies the maximum number of unicast
addresses, which can be learned from this port. This
can be modified when the admin status of bridge port
is disabled. Maximum number of unicast entries that
can be learned/configured on a bridge port on CPE
side is
GS_CFG_MAX_NUM_CPE_PORT_UCAST_MAC
_ENTRIES. The default value for number of unicast
entries that can be learned or configured on a bridge
port is
GS_CFG_DEF_NUM_CPE_PORT_UCAST_MAC
_ENTRIES. Maximum number of unicast entries that
can be learned/configured on a bridge port on NET
Max Unicast side is
Addresses GS_CFG_MAX_NUM_NET_PORT_UCAST_MAC
_ENTRIES. The default value for number of unicast
entries that can be learned or configured on a bridge
port is
GS_CFG_DEF_NUM_NET_PORT_UCAST_MAC_
ENTRIES. Maximum number of unicast entries that
can be learned/configured on a bridge port on down-
link side is
GS_CFG_MAX_NUM_DNLINK_PORT_UCAST_M
AC_ENTRIES. The default value for number of
uni-cast entries that can be learned or configured on a
bridge port is
GS_CFG_DEF_NUM_DNLINK_PORT_UCAST_M
AC_ENTRIES.
The state of learning on this bridge port. The value
enable (1) indicates that unicast Mac address learning
is enabled and the value disable indicates that unicast
Mac address learning is disabled on this bridge port.
Learning status The default value of learning status for CPE/Downlink
side bridge ports shall be
GS_CFG_DEF_PORT_LEARNING_STATUS and for
NET side bridge port default value shall be
GS_CFG_DEF_NET_PORT_LEARNING_STATU S.
The current operational state of the bridge port. If
AdminStatus of the bridge port is disable (2) then
OperStatus of the port should be disable (2). If Ad-
Port oper status minStatus of the bridge port is changed to enable(1)
then OperStatus of port should change to enable(1) if
the bridge port is ready to transmit and receive
network traffic.
The desired state of the bridge port. On creation the
Port admin status bridge port shall be created in enabled AdminStatus by
default.
Indicates if the port has been set as sticky. The value
enable (1) indicates that the entries learned on this
port will not be aged out. It also indicates that the
entries learned on this port shall not be learned on any
Sticky Status
other port. The entries learned on this port can only be
removed by management action or by making the
value as disable (2), so that the entries can be aged
out.
This specifies whether the global acl macentry deny
list represented by MO AclGlobalMacList is to be
Acl Global Deny
applied to this port or not. The default value of this
Apply
parameter shall depend on the port type. For Net side
ports, the default value shall be

116
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM
GS_CFG_DEF_NET_PORT_ACL_GLB_DENY_S
TATUS and for the cpe side ports the default value
shall be
GS_CFG_DEF_CPE_PORT_ACL_GLB_DENY_S
TATUS.
This specifies whether the global acl macentry track
list represented by MO AclGlobalMacList is to be
applied to this port or not. The default value of this
parameter shall depend on the port type. For Net side
Acl Global Track ports, the default value shall be
Apply GS_CFG_DEF_NET_PORT_ACL_GLB
_TRACK_STATUS and for the cpe side ports the
default value shall be
GS_CFG_DEF_CPE_PORT_ACL_GLB_
TRACK_STATUS.

5.5.23 Bridge Port Stats Table Commands

get bridge port stats

Description: Use this command to get the statistics of a single port, or all
the ports.
Command Syntax: get bridge port stats [portid portid]

reset bridge port stats

Description: Use this command to reset bridge port statistics.
Command Syntax: reset bridge port stats portid portid

Parameters
Name Description
This is the bridge port identifier. If this is not
specified in the get command, then information for
all ports is displayed.
portid portid Type : Get – Optional
Reset -- Mandatory
Valid values :
1-GS_CFG_MAX_BRIDGE_PORTS

Example $ get bridge port stats portid 1

Output Verbose Mode On

PortId :1
Max Info Size : 1500
Out Frames : 138
In Frames : 129
In Discards :3
HC In Frames : 300
HC Out Frames : 350
HC In Discards : 400

117
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM
Output Fields
FIELD Description
This is the bridge port identifier.
PortId
It can be : 1- GS_CFG_MAX_BRIDGE_PORTS
The maximum size of the INFO (non-MAC) field
Max Info Size
that this port will receive or transmit.
The number of frames that have been transmitted
Out Frames
by this port to its segment.
The number of frames that have been received by
In Frames
this port from its segment.
Count of valid frames received, which were
In Discards discarded (i.e., filtered) by the Forwarding
Process.
Number of frames that have been received by this
HC In Frames port from its segment. This is valid only for
Ethernet interfaces.
Number of frames that have been transmitted by
HC Out Frames this port to its segment. This is valid only for
Ethernet interfaces.
Count of valid frames received and discarded (i.e
HC In Discards filtered) by the Forwarding Process. This is valid
only for Ethernet interfaces.

5.5.24 Bridge Port Cap Commands

get bridge port cap

Description: Use this command is used to get.
Command Syntax: get bridge port cap [ portid portid ] Parameter

Parameters
Name Description
portid portid The index of base port
Type :Optional
Valid values:
1 –GS_CFG_MAX_BRIDGE_PORTS
Default value: None

Mode Super-User, User

Example get bridge port cap
Output portid : 45 Port Capabilites : Tagging Frame Types

Output Fields
Field Description

portid The index of base port.

Port Capabilites Capabilities that are allowed on a per-port basis.
Caution None
References None

118
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM

5.5.25 Ping Commands

ping
Description: This command is used to send one or more ICMP messages
to another host for a reply.
Command Syntax: ping {ip-address | domain-name} [-t | -n number] [-i
time-to-live] [-w seconds] [-s size]

Parameters
Name Description
This specifies the Destination address to be
pinged.
Type : Mandatory
ip-address | domain-name Valid values : Any Valid IP Address (0.0.0.0 –
255.255.255.255) or Domain Name - String of
Max 63 characters (‘a’-‘z’, ’A’-‘Z’, ’0’-‘9’,
’-‘, ’_’and ‘.‘)
This indicates continuous ping to host, until the
-t user interrupts.
Type: Optional
This specifies the number of pings to send to
host.
-n number Type : Optional
Valid values : 1-65535
Default Value: 4
This specifies the time interval between
successive ping requests
-w seconds Type : Optional
Valid values : 0-65535
Default Value : 2
This specifies the time-to-live, to be filled in the
ping request
-I time-to-live Type : Optional
Valid values : 0 – 255
Default Value : 64
This specifies the size of payload for ping.
Type : Optional
-s size
Valid values : 4-1500
Default Value : 64

Example $ ping 192.168.1.13

Output
$ ping 192.168.1.13
64 bytes of data from 192.168.1.13, seq=0 ttl=64 rtt=0.000 msec
64 bytes of data from 192.168.1.13, seq=1 ttl=64 rtt=0.000 msec
64 bytes of data from 192.168.1.13, seq=2 ttl=64 rtt=0.000 msec
64 bytes of data from 192.168.1.13, seq=3 ttl=64 rtt=0.000 msec

--------------------Ping Statistics --------------------

4 packets transmitted, 4 packets received, 0 percent packet loss

119
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM
Output Fields
FIELD Description
This denotes the number of bytes in the ping
64 bytes of...
packet and the source IP Address.
Seq This denotes the ping attempt counter value.
Ttl This is the Time to live for the packet.
This denotes the Round trip Time for the
Rtt
packet. A value less than 10ms is shown as 0.

5.5.26 ADSL Line Profile Commands

get adsl line profile

Description: Use this command to get.
Command Syntax: get adsl line profile [ifname ifname]

modify adsl line profile

Description: Use this command to modify.
Command Syntax: modify adsl line profile ifname ifname
[ atucrateadaptation fixed | adaptAtStartup |
adaptAtRuntime ] [ gsparamtestinputfile
gsparamtestinputfile ] [ atuctargetsnr atuctargetsnr ]
[ atucmaxsnrmargin atucmaxsnrmargin ]
[ atucgsrsintcorrectionup 125us | 250us | 500us | 1ms |
2ms | 4ms | disable ] [ atucdnshiftsnrmargin
atucdnshiftsnrmargin ] [ atucupshiftsnrmargin
atucupshiftsnrmargin ] [ atucminupshifttime
atucminupshifttime ] [ atucmindnshifttime
atucmindnshifttime ] [ atucfastmintxrate
atucfastmintxrate ] [ atucintlmintxrate atucintlmintxrate ]
[ atucfastmaxtxrate atucfastmaxtxrate ]
[ atucintlmaxtxrate atucintlmaxtxrate ] [ atucmaxintldelay
atucmaxintldelay ] [ type noChannel | fastOnly |
interleavedOnly | fastOrInterleaved | fastAndInterleaved ]
[ atucgstxendbin atucgstxendbin ] [ atucgstxstartbin
atucgstxstartbin ] [ atucgsmaxbitsperbin
atucgsmaxbitsperbin ] [ atucgsrxstartbin
atucgsrxstartbin ] [ atucgsrxendbin atucgsrxendbin ]
[ atucgsrxbinadjust disable ] [ atucgsltriggermode
disable | {locCrc | rmtCrc | snrInc | snrDec}+ ]
[ atucgsadi2x standard ] [ atucgsstandard t1413 | gLite |
gDmt | alctl14 | multimode | adi | alctl | t1413Auto |
adslPlus| GspanPlus] [ atucgsinitiate waitPn | ctone |
initiatePn ] [ atucgstxpoweratten0|.1|.2|.3|.4|.5 |.6 | .7
| .8|.9 | 1 |2| 3|4 |5 |6| 7|8 |9 |10 | 11 | 12 ]
[ atucgscodinggain Auto | 0 | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 |
6|7][ atucgsrsfastovrhddn 50 | 25 | 12 |6|3|1| Disable ]
[ atucgsrsintcorrectiondn 125Us | 250Us | 500Us | 1Ms |
2Ms | 4Ms | Disable ] [ atucgsrsfastovrhdup 50 | 25 | 12
|6|3 | 1 | Disable ] [ atucgsdrstby Disable | Enable ]
[ atucgsexpexch Expanded | Short ]
[ atucgsescfastretrain Enable | Disable ]
[ atucgsfastretrain Enable | Disable ] [ atucgsbitswap
Disable | Enable ] [ atucgsntr LocalOcs | Refck8K ]

120
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM
[ atucgsannextype AnnexA | AnnexB | HighSpeed|
GspanPlus | V1010] [ atucgsalctlusver Unknown ]
[ atucgsusecustombin Enable | Disable ]
[ atucgsdnbinusage atucgsdnbinusage ] [ atucgsmaxdco
64 | 128 | 256 ] [ atucgsfullretrain Enable | Disable ]
[ atucgsadvcap disable | {annexa | annexb | adslplus|
gspanplus}+ ] [ atucgspsdmasktype Adsl | HsadslM1 |
HsadslM2 ] [ dmtconfmode ecMode | fdmMode ]
[ atucgseraseprofs enable | disable ]
[ atucgsextrsmemory present | notpresent ]
[ paramhybridlossteststart paramhybridlossteststart ]
[ paramhybridlosstestend paramhybridlosstestend ]
[ dmttrellis on | off ] [ aturtargetsnrmargin
aturtargetsnrmargin ] [aturdnshiftsnrmargin
aturdnshiftsnrmargin ] [aturupshiftsnrmargin
aturupshiftsnrmargin ] [aturminupshifttime
aturminupshifttime ]
[ aturmindnshifttimeaturmindnshifttime ]
[ aturfastmintxrate aturfastmintxrate ][ aturintlmintxrate
aturintlmintxrate ] [ aturfastmaxtxrateaturfastmaxtxrate ]
[ aturintlmaxtxrate aturintlmaxtxrate ] [aturmaxintldelay
aturmaxintldelay ][ databoost
Enable|Disable][ upstreampsd Extended|Standard ]

Parameters
Name Description
The ADSL line interface name, whose profile is to
be modified or viewed
ifname ifname Type : Modify - Mandatory
Get Optional
Valid values: dsl-0 - dsl-*
Defines what form of transmit rate adaptation is
atucrateadaptation fixed | con
adaptAtStartup | figured, on this modem. Refer to ADSL Forum
adaptAtRuntime TR- 005 for more information.
Type : Modify Optional
Indicates Name of the Input file, which contains
the
gsparamtestinputfile
Mask Array Size, lower and upper mask Array.
gsparamtestinputfile
Null string means no file is specified.
Type : Modify -- Optional
Configured Target Signal/Noise Margin. This is
the Noise Margin the modem must achieve with a
atuctargetsnr BER of 10 to the power 7, or better, to
atuctargetsnr successfully complete initialization.
Type : Modify -- Optional
Valid values: 0 - 310
Configured Maximum acceptable Signal/Noise
Margin. If the Noise Margin is above this, the
atucmaxsnrmargin modem should attempt to reduce its power
atucmaxsnrmargin output to optimize its operation.
Type : Modify -- Optional
Valid values: 0 - 310
atucgsrsintcorrectionup Sets the correction time for the upstream
125us | 250us | 500us | 1ms interleaved buffer. RS can also be disabled.
| 2ms | 4ms | disable Type : Modify -- Optional

121
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM
Configured Signal/Noise Margin for rate
downshift. If the noise margin falls below this
level, the modem should attempt to decrease its
atucdnshiftsnrmargin
transmit rate. In the case that RADSL mode is
atucdnshiftsnrmargin
not present, the value will be 0.
Type : Modify -- Optional
Valid values: 0 - 310
Configured Signal/Noise Margin for rate upshift. If
the noise margin rises above this level, the
modem should attempt to increase its transmit
atucupshiftsnrmargin
rate. In the case that RADSL is not present, the
atucupshiftsnrmargin
value will be 0.
Type : Modify -- Optional
Valid values: 0 - 310
Minimum time that the current margin is above
UpshiftSnrMgn, before an upshift occurs. In the
atucminupshifttime case that RADSL is not present, the value will be
atucminupshifttime 0.
Type : Modify -- Optional
Valid values: 0 - 16383
Minimum time that the current margin is below
DownshiftSnrMgn, before a downshift occurs. In
atucmindnshifttime the case that RADSL is not present, the value will
atucmindnshifttime be 0.
Type : Modify -- Optional
Get -- Optional
Valid values: 0 - 16383
Configured Minimum Transmit rate for 'Fast'
channels, in bps. Also refer to
'adslAtucConfRateChanRatio' for information
atucfastmintxrate
regarding RADSL mode. Refer to ATU-R transmit
atucfastmintxrate
rate for ATU-C receive rates.
Type : Modify -- Optional
Valid values: 0 - 0xffffffff
Configured Minimum Transmit rate for
'Interleave' channels, in bps. Also refer to
'adslAtucConfRate-ChanRatio' for information
atucintlmintxrate
regarding RADSL mode and refer to ATU-R
atucintlmintxrate
transmit rate for ATU-C receive rates.
Type : Modify --Optional
Valid values: 0 - 0xffffffff
Configured Maximum Transmit rate for 'Fast'
channels, in bps. Also refer to
'adslAtucConfRateChanRatio' for information
atucfastmaxtxrate
regarding RADSL mode. Refer to ATU-R transmit
atucfastmaxtxrate
rate for ATU-C receive rates.
Type : Modify -- Optional
Valid values: 0 - 0xffffffff
Configured Maximum Transmit rate for
'Interleave' channels, in bps. Also refer to
atucintlmaxtxrate 'adslAtucConfRateChanRatio' for information
atucintlmaxtxrate regarding RADSL mode and ATU-R transmit rate
for ATU-C receive rates.
Type : Modify -- Optional
Valid values: 0 - 0xffffffff

122
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM
Configured maximum Interleave Delay for this
channel. Interleave delay applies only to the
interleave channel and defines the mapping
(relative spacing) between subsequent input
bytes at the interleaver input and their placement
atucmaxintldelay in the bit stream at the interleaver output. Larger
atucmaxintldelay numbers provide greater separation between
consecutive input bytes in the output bit stream,
allowing for improved impulse noise immunity at
the expense of payload latency.
Type : Modify -- Optional
Valid values: 0 - 255
type noChannel | fastOnly |
This object is used to configure the ADSL
interleavedOnly |
physical line mode
fastOrInterleaved |
Type : Modify --Optional
fastAndInterleaved
The highest bin number allowed for Tx signal.
atucgstxendbin Type : Modify -- Optional
atucgstxendbin Valid values:
0x06 - GS_CFG_MAX_ATUC_TX_END_BIN
The lowest bin number allowed for Tx signal.
atucgstxstartbin Type : Modify – Optional
atucgstxstartbin Valid values:
0x06 - GS_CFG_MAX_ATUC_TX_START_BIN
The maximum Rx number of bits per bin.
atucgsmaxbitsperbin
Type : Modify Optional
atucgsmaxbitsperbin
Valid values: 0 - 15
The lowest bin number allowed for Rx signal.
atucgsrxstartbin Type : Modify -- Optional
atucgsrxstartbin Valid values: 0x01 -
GS_CFG_MAX_ATUC_RX_START_BIN
The highest bin number allowed for Rx signal.
atucgsrxendbin Type : Modify - Optional
atucgsrxendbin Valid values: 0x06 -
GS_CFG_MAX_ATUC_RX_END_BIN
This parameter employs Rx Start/End bin
atucgsrxbinadjust disable settings
Type : Modify -- Optional
atucgsltriggermode
The type of event that triggers a fast retrain
disable | {locCrc | rmtCrc |
Type: Modify --Optional
snrInc | snrDec}+
For non-standard compliant ADI CPE
atucgsadi2x standard
Type: Modify --Optional
Preferred standard compliance. Outcome is
atucgsstandard t1413 |
dependent upon standard support of the remote
gLite | gDmt | alctl14 |
unit.GlobespanVirata High Speed ADSL DMT
multimode | adi | alctl |
(AD-
t1413Auto|adslPlus|
SL+)applications only
GspanPlus
Type: Modify --Optional
Specifies which end initiates startup. It is also
atucgsinitiate waitPn |
used to send a C-tone to the remote unit.
ctone | initiatePn
Type: Modify --Optional
atucgstxpoweratten0|.1 |.2
The value in dB of Tx power attenuation
| .3 |.4 | .5 |.6 |.7| .8|.9| 1|2| 3|
Type: Modify --Optional
4|5 |6| 7| 8|9 |10|11|12
atucgscodinggain Auto | 0 Sets the coding gain in dB increments
|1 |2|3|4 |5|6|7 Type: Modify --Optional

123
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM
This parameter sets the percentage overhead for
atucgsrsfastovrhddn 50 | the downstream fast buffer. RS can also be
25|12|6| 3|1| Disable disabled.
Type: Modify --Optional
This parameter sets the correction time for the
atucgsrsintcorrectiondn
downstream interleaved buffer. RS can also be
125Us | 250Us | 500Us |
disabled.
1Ms | 2Ms | 4Ms | Disable
Type: Modify --Optional
This parameter sets the percentage overhead for
atucgsrsfastovrhdup 50 | the upstream fast buffer. RS can also be
25|12|6| 3|1| Disable disabled.
Type: Modify --Optional
This parameter provides the ability to disable
atucgsdrstby Disable | power
Enable to the line driver
Type: Modify --Optional
atucgsexpexch Expanded | T1.413 parameter that Enables/Disables EES
Short Type: Modify --Optional
This parameter enables/disables escape to
atucgsescfastretrain
the fast retrain capability
Enable | Disable
Type: Modify --Optional
This parameter enables/disables the fast retrain
atucgsfastretrain Enable | capability. Currently supported only in G.lite
Disable mode.
Type: Modify --Optional
atucgsbitswap Disable | This parameter enables/disables bit swapping
Enable Type: Modify --Optional
This parameter enables/disables NTR on a per
atucgsntr LocalOcs |
chip basis
Refck8K
Type: Modify --Optional
This parameter is set as per annex compliance of
atucgsannextype AnnexA |
the code release. GlobespanVirata High Speed
AnnexB | HighSpeed |
ADSL DMT (ADSL+) applications only
GspanPlus | V1010
Type: Modify --Optional
For T1.413 demo purposes only
atucgsalctlusver Unknown
Type: Modify --Optional

124
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM

This parameter enables/disables user

selection of any of the 511 bins that will be
tucgsusecustombin Enable |
enabled for upstream and downstream
Disable
transmission.
Type: Modify --Optional
'1' in bit position indicates usage of
atucgsdnbinusage corresponding bin. '0' disables usage of
atucgsdnbinusage corresponding bin.
Type: Modify --Optional
Maximum interleaving depth supported by the
atucgsmaxdco 64 | 128 |256 customer's hardware
Type: Modify --Optional
Indicates enable/disable of auto retrain
atucgsfullretrain Enable
capability
| Disable
Type: Modify --Optional
This parameter controls if the CO will attempt
atucgsadvcap disable |
to startup using alternate standards if the CPE
{annexa | annexb | adslplus |
does not support ADSL+.
gspanplus}+
Type: Modify --Optional
This parameter selects the PSD mask option
atucgspsdmasktype Adsl |
to be used
HsadslM1 | HsadslM2
Type: Modify --Optional
Indicates whether there is overlap or no
dmtconfmode ecMode |
overlap of bins
fdmMode
Type: Modify --Optional
This parameter enables/disables the ability
atucgseraseprofs enable |
to erase all fast retrain profiles at startup
disable
Type: Modify --Optional
Indicates whether customer's Hardware uses
atucgsextrsmemory present |
external RS RAM
notpresent
Type: Modify --Optional
Start bin for range of bins to be measured
Type : Modify -- Optional
paramhybridlossteststart Valid values: 0x0 -
paramhybridlossteststart GS_CFG_MAX_ATUC_HYBRID_TEST_STA
RT_B
IN
End bin for range of bins to be measured
Type : Modify -- Optional
paramhybridlosstestend
Valid values: 0x0 -
paramhybridlosstestend
GS_CFG_MAX_ATUC_HYBRID_TEST_END
_BIN
This parameter enables/disables trellis
coding.
dmttrellis on | off Trellis coding should always be enabled for its
clear performance advantage.
Type : Modify -- Optional
Configured Target Signal/Noise Margin. This is
the Noise Margin the modem must achieve
aturtargetsnrmargin with a BER of 10to the power 7 or better, to
aturtargetsnrmargin successfully complete initialization.
Type : Modify -- Optional
Valid values: 0 - 310

125
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM
Configured Signal/Noise Margin for rate
downshift.
If the noise margin falls below this level, the
aturdnshiftsnrmargin modem should attempt to decrease its transmit
aturdnshiftsnrmargin rate. In the case that RADSL mode is not
present, the value will be 0.
Type : Modify -- Optional
Valid values: 0 - 310
Configured Signal/ Noise Margin for rate
upshift. If the noise margin rises above this
level, the modem should attempt to increase its
aturupshiftsnrmargin
transmit rate. In the case that RADSL is not
aturupshiftsnrmargin
present, the value will be 0.
Type : Modify -- Optional
Valid values: 0 - 310
Minimum time that the current margin is above
Up shiftSnrMgn before an upshift occurs. In the
aturminupshifttime case that RADSL is not present, the value will
aturminupshifttime be 0.
Type : Modify -- Optional
Valid values: 0 - 16383
Minimum time that the current margin is below
DownshiftSnrMgn before a downshift occurs.
aturmindnshifttime In the case that RADSL mode is not present,
aturmindnshifttime the value will be 0.
Type : Modify -- Optional
Valid values: 0 - 16383
Configured Minimum Transmit rate for 'Fast'
channels, in bps. Also refer to
'adslAturConfRateChan-Ratio' for information
aturfastmintxrate
regarding RADSL mode and ATU-C transmit
aturfastmintxrate
rate for ATU-R receive rates.
Type : Modify -- Optional
Valid values: 0 - 0xffff
Configured Minimum Transmit rate for
'Interleave' channels, in bps. Also refer to
'adslAturConfRate-ChanRatio' for information
aturintlmintxrate regarding RADSL mode and refer to ATU-C
aturintlmintxrate transmit rate for ATUR receive rates.
Type : Modify -- Optional
Valid values: 0 - 0xffff
Configured Maximum Transmit rate for 'Fast'
channels, in bps. Also refer to
'adslAturConfRateChan-Ratio' for information
aturfastmaxtxrate
regarding RADSL mode and refer to ATU-C
aturfastmaxtxrate
transmit rate for ATUR receive rates.
Type : Modify -- Optional
Valid values: 0 - 0xffff
Configured Maximum Transmit rate for
'Interleave' channels, in bps. Also refer to
'adslAturConfRate-ChanRatio' for information
aturintlmaxtxrate
regarding RADSL mode and ATU-C transmit
aturintlmaxtxrate
rate for ATU-R receive rates.
Type : Modify -- Optional
Valid values: 0 - 0xffff

126
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM
Configured maximum Interleave Delay for this
channel. Interleave delay applies only to the
interleave channel and defines the mapping
(relative spacing) between subsequent input
bytes at the interleaver input and their
placement in the bit stream at the interleaver
aturmaxintldelay
output. Larger numbers provide greater
aturmaxintldelay
separation between consecutive input bytes in
the output bit stream, allowing for improved
impulse noise immunity at the expense of
payload latency.
Type : Modify -- Optional
Valid values: 0 - 255
GlobespanVirata parameter that
enables/disables DataBoost option
databoost Enable|Disable
Type : Modify -- Optional
Valid values: Enable|Disable
upstreampsd GlobespanVirata parameter that sets the
Extended|Standard upstream PSD to be either extended or
standard. Used for GSpan Plus only
Type : Modify -- Optional
Valid values: Extended|Standard

Example $ get adsl line profile ifname dsl-0

Output Verbose Mode On

IfName : dsl-0

ADSL ATUC Configuration :

---------------------------------------

Rate Adaptation : fixed Max Snr Margin(dB/10) : 40

Target Snr Margin(dB/10) : 20 Dnshift SnrMargin(dB/10) : 35
GsRsIntCorrectionUp : 1ms Min Upshift Time(sec) : 70
Upshift SnrMargin(dB/10) : 50 Fast Min Tx Rate(bps) : 0x20
Min Dnshift Time(sec) : 10 Fast Max Tx Rate(bps) : 0x50
Intl Min Tx Rate(bps) : 0x40 Max Intl Delay(ms) : 10
Intl Max Tx Rate(bps) : 0x60 GsTxEndBin : 0x06
GsTxStartBin : 0x20 GsRxEndBin : 0x1f
GsRxStartBin : 0x06 GsMaxDCo : 64
GsMaxBitsPerBin : 15 GsEraseProfiles : enable
GsRxBinAdjust : enable GsStandard : t1413
GsAdi2x : standard GsTxPowerAtten : .6
GsInitiate : waitPn GsRsFastOvrhdDown :1
GsCodingGain : Auto GsRsFastOvrhdUp : 50
GsRsIntCorrectionDown : 125Us GsExpandedExchange : Short
GsDrStby : Disable GsFastRetrain : Enable
GsEscapeFastRetrain : Enable GsNtr :
LocalOcs
GsBitSwap : Enable GsAlctlUsVer :
Unknown
GsAnnexType : AnnexA GsFullRetrain : Enable
GsUseCustomBin : Enable DmtConfMode :
ecMode
GsPsdMaskType : Adsl GsParamHybridLossTestStart : 0x10
GsExtRsMemory : ExtRsMemory GsDmtTrellis : on
GsParamHybridLossTestEnd : 0x23
GslTriggerMode : rmtCrc
Type : noChannel
GsDnBinUsage : 0xff
ParametricTestInputFile : TestFile
Data Boost : Enable Upstream
PSD : Standard

ADSL ATUR Configuration :

127
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM
----------------------------------------
Target Snr Margin(dB/10) : 20 Dnshift
SnrMargin(dB/10) : 35
Upshift SnrMargin(dB/10) : 50 Min Upshift
Time(sec) : 70
Min Dnshift Time(sec) : 10 Fast Min Tx
Rate(bps) : 0x20
Intl Min Tx Rate(bps) : 0x10 Fast Max Tx
Rate(bps) : 0x40
Intl Max Tx Rate(bps) : 0x60 Max Intl
Delay(ms) : 10

Output Fields
Field Description
The ADSL line interface name, whose profile is to be
IfName
modified or viewed.
Defines what form of transmit rate adaptation is configured
Rate Adaptation on this modem. Refer to ADSL Forum TR-005 for more
information.
Configured Target Signal/Noise Margin. This is the Noise
Target Snr Margin(dB/10) Margin the modem must achieve with a BER of 10 to the
power -7 or better to successfully complete initialization.
Configured Maximum acceptable Signal/Noise Margin. If
Max Snr Margin(dB/10) the Noise Margin is above this, the modem should attempt
to reduce its power output to optimize its operation.
Sets the correction time for the upstream interleaved
GsRsIntCorrectionUp
buffer. RS can also be disabled.
Configured Signal/Noise Margin for rate downshift. If the
noise margin falls below this level, the modem should
Dnshift SnrMargin(dB/10)
attempt to decrease its transmit rate. In the case that
RADSL mode is not present, the value will be 0.
Configured Signal/Noise Margin for rate upshift. If the
noise margin rises above this level, the modem should
Upshift SnrMargin(dB/10)
attempt to increase its transmit rate. In the case that
RADSL is not present, the value will be 0.
Minimum time that the current margin is above Up-
Min Upshift Time(sec) shiftSnrMgn before an upshift occurs. In the case that
RADSL is not present, the value will be 0.

Minimum time that the current margin is below

Min Dnshift Time(sec) DownshiftSnrMgn before a downshift occurs. In the case
that RADSL is not present, the value will be 0.
Configured Minimum Transmit rate for 'Interleave'
channels, in bps. Also refer to
Intl Min Tx Rate(bps) 'adslAtucConfRate-ChanRatio' for information regarding
RADSL mode and refer to ATU-R transmit rate for ATU-C
receive rates.
Configured Maximum Transmit rate for 'Fast' chan
nels, in bps. Also refer to 'adslAtucConfRateChan-Ratio'
Fast Max Tx Rate(bps)
for information regarding RADSL mode and ATU-R
transmit rate for ATU-C receive rates.
Configured Maximum Transmit rate for 'Interleave'
channels, in bps. Also refer to
Intl Max Tx Rate(bps) 'adslAtucConfRateChanRatio' for information regarding
RADSL mode and ATU-R transmit rate for ATU-C receive
rates.
Configured maximum Interleave Delay for this channel.
Interleave delay applies only to the interleave channel and
defines the mapping (relative spacing) between
Max Intl Delay(ms) subsequent input bytes at the interleaver input and their
placement in the bit stream at the interleaver output.
Larger numbers provide greater separation between
consecutive input bytes in the output bit stream, allowing

128
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM
for improved impulse noise immunity at the expense of
payload latency.

GsTxStartBin The lowest bin number allowed for Tx signal.

GsTxEndBin The highest bin number allowed for Tx signal.

GsRxStartBin The lowest bin number allowed for Rx signal.

GsRxEndBin The highest bin number allowed for Rx signal.

GsMaxBitsPerBin The maximum Rx number of bits per bin.

Maximum interleaving depth supported by the customer's
GsMaxDCo
hardware.
GsRxBinAdjust This parameter employs Rx Start/End bin settings.
This parameter enables/disables the ability to erase all fast
GsEraseProfiles
retrain profiles at startup.
GsAdi2x For non-standard compliant ADI CPE.
Preferred standard compliance. Outcome is dependent
upon standard support of the remote unit.
GsStandard
GlobespanVirata High Speed ADSL DMT
(ADSL+)applications only.
Specifies which end initiates startup. It is also used to send
GsInitiate
a C-tone to the remote unit.
GsTxPowerAtten The value in dB of Tx power attenuation.

GsCodingGain Sets the coding gain in dB increments.

This parameters sets the percentage overhead for the
GsRsFastOvrhdDown
downstream fast buffer. RS can also be disabled.
This parameter sets the correction time for the
GsRsIntCorrectionDown
downstream interleaved buffer. RS can also be disabled.
This parameter sets the percentage overhead for the
GsRsFastOvrhdUp
upstream fast buffer. RS can also be disabled.
This parameter provides the ability to disable power to the
GsDrStby
line driver.
GsExpandedExchange T1.413 parameter that Enables/Disables EES.

This parameter enables/disables escape to the fast retrain

GsEscapeFastRetrain
capability.
This parameter enables/disables the fast retrain capability.
GsFastRetrain
Currently supported only in G.lite mode.
GsBitSwap This parameter enables/disables bit swapping.
GsNtr This parameter enables/disables NTR on a per chip basis.
This parameter is set as per Annex compliance of the
GsAnnexType code release. GlobespanVirata High Speed ADSL DMT
(ADSL+) applications only
GsAlctlUsVer For T1.413 demo purposes only.
This parameter enables/disables user selection of some of
GsUseCustomBin those 511 bins that will be enabled for upstream and
downstream transmission.
GsFullRetrain Indicates enable/disable of auto retrain capability.
This parameter selects the PSD mask option to be
GsPsdMaskType
used
DmtConfMode Indicates whether there is overlap or no overlap of bins.
Indicates whether customer's Hardware uses external RS
GsExtRsMemory
RAM.

129
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM
GsParamHybridLossTest
Start bin for range of bins to be measured.
Sta rt
GsParamHybridLossTest
End bin for range of bins to be measured.
End
This parameter enables/disables trellis coding. Trellis
GsDmtTrellis coding should always be enabled for its clear performance
advantage.
This parameter controls if the CO will attempt to startup
GsAdvertisedCapabilities using alternate standards if the CPE does not support
ADSL+.

GslTriggerMode The type of event that triggers a fast retrain.

This object is used to configure the ADSL physical line
Type
mode.

'1' in bit position indicates usage of corresponding bin,

GsDnBinUsage
whereas a '0' disables usage of corresponding bin.

Indicates Name of the Input file that contains the Mask

ParametricTestInputFile Array Size, lower and upper mask Array. Null string means
no file is specified.

Configured Target Signal/Noise Margin. This is the Noise

Target Snr Margin(dB/10) Margin the modem must achieve with a BER of 10 to the
power -7, or better, to successfully complete initialization.

Configured Signal/ Noise Margin for rate upshift. If the

noise margin rises above this level, the modem should
Upshift SnrMargin(dB/10)
attempt to increase its transmit rate. In the case that
RADSL is not present, the value will be 0.
Minimum time that the current margin is above Up-
Min Upshift Time(sec) shiftSnrMgn, before an upshift occurs. In the case that
RADSL is not present, the value will be 0.
Minimum time that the current margin is below
Min Dnshift Time(sec) DownshiftSnrMgn, before a downshift occurs. In the case
that RADSL mode is not present, the value will be 0.
Configured Minimum Transmit rate for 'Fast' channels, in
bps. Also refer to 'adslAturConfRateChanRatio' for
Fast Min Tx Rate(bps)
information regarding RADSL mode and ATU-C transmit
rate for ATU-R receive rates.
Configured Minimum Transmit rate for 'Interleave'
channels, in bps. Also refer to
Intl Min Tx Rate(bps) 'adslAturConfRateChanRatio' for information regarding
RADSL mode and to ATU-C transmit rate for ATUR
receive rates.
Configured Maximum Transmit rate for 'Fast' channels, in
bps. Also refer to 'adslAturConfRateChan-Ratio' for
Fast Max Tx Rate(bps)
information regarding RADSL mode and to ATU-C
transmit rate for ATUR receive rates.
Configured Maximum Transmit rate for 'Interleave'
channels, in bps. Also refer to
Intl Max Tx Rate(bps) 'adslAturConfRateChanRatio' for information regarding
RADSL mode and to ATU-C transmit rate for ATU-R
receive rates.
Configured maximum Interleave Delay for this chan
nel. Interleave delay applies only to the interleave channel
and defines the mapping (relative spacing)
between subsequent input bytes at the interleaver
Max Intl Delay(ms) input and their placement in the bit stream at the in-
terleaver output. Larger numbers provide greater
separation between consecutive input bytes in the
output bit stream, allowing for improved impulse noise
immunity at the expense of payload latency.
Data Boost GlobespanVirata parameter that enables/disables

130
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM
DataBoost option

GlobespanVirata parameter that sets the upstream PSD to

Upstream PSD
be either extended or standard. Used for GSpan Plus only

5.5.27 ADSL Line Intf Commands

get adsl line intf

Description: Use this command to view ADSL line configuration.
Command Syntax: get adsl line intf [ ifname ifname ]

modify adsl line intf

Description: Use this command to modify ADSL line configuration.
Command Syntax: modify adsl line intf ifname ifname [ lineconfgsaction
startup| spectrumReverb | analogLb | digitalLb | atmLp
|spectrumMedley | spectrumPilot | spectrumCMtpr
|spectrumRMtpr | hybridLossTest | rcvLinearityTest
|rcvFilterTest | rcvPowerPerBinTest |
idleNoisePerBinTest |totalIdleNoiseTest|selt] [enable |
disable]

Parameters
Name Description

The Interface name of DSL port.

Type : Modify – Mandatory
ifname ifname
Get - Optional
Valid values: dsl-*
lineconfgsaction startup |
spectrumReverb | analogLb
| digitalLb | atmLp |
spectrumMedley |
spectrumPilot |
spectrumCMtpr |
Allows action on per-line basis.
spectrumRMtpr |
Type : Optional
hybridLossTest |
rcvLinearityTest |
rcvFilterTest |
rcvPowerPerBinTest |
idleNoisePerBinTest |
totalIdleNoiseTest|selt
Administrative Status of the interface.
Enable|disable Type : Optional
Valid values: enable or disable

Example $ get adsl line intf ifname dsl-0

Output Verbose Mode On

131
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM

Output Fields
Field Description
IfName The interface name of the DSL port.
Line Type Line type used by the DSL port.
Coding Type Line coding type used by the port.
GsUtopia L2TxAddr UTOPIA Level 2 Tx address for a line.
GsUtopia L2RxAddr UTOPIA Level 2 Rx address.
Gs Clock Type Indicates use of crystal or oscillator.
Gs Action Allows action on per-line basis.
Admin Status Administrative Status of the interface.
Oper Status Operational Status of the interface.
Trans Atuc Cap Transmission modes that ATU-C is capable of.
Trans Atuc Actual Transmission modes
Indicates whether trellis coding has been enabled
GsDmtTrellis
or not.
The transmission modes that the ATU-R is capable
Trans Atur Cap of supporting. The modes available are limited by
the design of the equipment (length = 4 bytes).

Caution None

References • modify adsl line profile

ٛ. • modify adsl alarm profile
ٛ. • get adsl line profile
• get adsl alarm profile.

5.5.28 DSL System Commands

get dsl system

Description: Use this command to view DSL system sizing information
Command Syntax: get dsl system

create dsl system

Description: Use this command to create.
Command create dsl system [ dsltype Adsl | Sdsl | Shdsl ]
Syntax: [ linecodingOther|Dmt|Cap|Qam ] [ txcfg {ansit1413 | etsi
|q9921PotsNonOverlapped | q9921PotsOverlapped
|q9921IsdnNonOverlapped |
q9921IsdnOverlapped|q9921TcmIsdnNonOverlapped |
q9921TcmIsdnOverlapped |q9922PotsNonOverlapped |
q9922PotsOverlapped |q9922TcmIsdnNonOverlapped
|q9922TcmIsdnOverlapped |q9921TcmIsdnSymmetric |
adslPlusPotsNonOverlapped
|q9921GspanPlusPotsNonOverlapped|q9921GspanPlusPotsOve

132
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM
rlapped | vdslNonOverlapped |vdslOverlapped }+ ]

Parameters
Name Description
Identifies the firmware to be downloaded.
dsltype Adsl | Sdsl | Type :Optional for all commands
Default value: adsl
ADSL line code type.
linecoding Other | Dmt |
Type :Optional for all commands
Cap | Qam
Default value: Dmt
txcfg {ansit1413 | etsi |
q9921PotsNonOverlapped |
q9921PotsOverlapped |
q9921IsdnNonOverlapped |
q9921IsdnOverlapped |
q9921TcmIsdnNonOverlapped|
q9921TcmIsdnOverlapped |
Transmission capabilities with which the DSL
q9922PotsNonOverlapped |
system is configured.
q9922PotsOverlapped |
Type : Optional for all commands
q9922TcmIsdnNonOverlappe d|
Default value: q9921PotsNonOverlapped |
q9922TcmIsdnOverlapped
q9921PotsOverlapped
|q9921TcmIsdnSymmetric |
q9921GspanPlusPotsNonOve
rlapped |
q9921GspanPlusPotsOverla
pped | vdslNonOverlapped |
vdslOverlapped }+
adslPlusPotsNonOverlappe d}+

Example $ create dsl system txcfg q9921potsNonOverlapped

Output Verbose Mode On

DSL Type : Adsl Line coding : Dmt
Tx Config : q9921potsNonOverlapped

Output Fields
Field Description

DSL Type Identifies the firmware to be downloaded.

Line coding ADSL line code type.
Transmission capabilities with which the DSL
Tx Config
sys tem is configured.

Caution None.

5.5.29 ADSL Cap Commands

get adsl cap

Description: Use this command to view DSL transmission capability.
Command Syntax: get adsl cap

133
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM

Parameters None
Example $ get adsl cap
Output Verbose Mode On
Tx Capability : q9921potsOverlapped
q9921potsNonOverlapped

Output Fields
Field Description

Tx Capability Transmission capabilities of the DSL system.

Caution None
References • create dsl system
• get dsl system.

5.5.30 ADSL Alarm Profile Commands

get adsl alarm profile

Description: Use this command to view ADSL alarm profile, corresponding to
an ADSL interface.
Command Syntax: get adsl alarm profile [ ifname ifname ]

modify adsl alarm profile

Description: Use this command to modify ADSL alarm profile, corresponding
to an ADSL interface.
Command Syntax: modify adsl alarm profile ifname ifname
[ atucthresh15minlofs atucthresh15minlofs ]
[ atucthresh15minloss atucthresh15minloss ]
[atucthresh15minlols atucthresh15minlols ]
[ atucthresh15minlprs atucthresh15minlprs ]
[ atucthresh15minessatucthresh15miness ]
[atucthreshfastrateup atucthreshfastrateup ]
[ atucthreshintlrateupatucthreshintlrateup ]
[ atucthreshfastratedn atucthreshfastratedn ]
[atucthreshintlratedn atucthreshintlratedn ] [ atucinitfailtrap
atucinitfailtrap][atucoptrapenable atucoptrapenable ]
[ aturthresh15minlofs
aturthresh15minlofs ][ aturthresh15minloss
aturthresh15minloss ]
[ aturthresh15minlprsaturthresh15minlprs ]
[ aturthresh15miness aturthresh15miness ]
[aturthreshfastrateup aturthreshfastrateup ]
[ aturthreshintlrateupaturthreshintlrateup ]
[ aturthreshfastratedn aturthreshfastratedn ]
[aturthreshintlratedn aturthreshintlratedn ]

Parameters
Name Description
The ADSL alarm interface name, whose profile is to
be modified or viewed
ifname ifname
Type : Modify -- Mandatory Get Optional
Valid values: dsl-0 - dsl-*

134
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM
The number of Loss of Frame Seconds
encountered by an ADSL interface within any given
15 minutes performance data collection period,
atucthresh15minlofs
which causes the SNMP agent to send an
atucthresh15minlofs
'adslAtucPerfLofsThreshTrap'
Type : Modify -- Optional
Valid values: 0 - 900

The number of Loss of Signal Seconds

encountered by an ADSL interfac, within any given
15 minutes performance data collection period,
atucthresh15minloss
which causes the SNMP agent to send an
atucthresh15minloss
'adslAtucPerfLossThreshTrap'
Type : Modify -- Optional
Valid values: 0 - 900

The number of Loss of Link Seconds encountered

by an ADSL interface, within any given 15 minutes
performance data collection period, which causes
atucthresh15minlols
the SNMP agent to send an
atucthresh15minlols
'adslAtucPerfLolsThreshTrap'.
Type : Modify - Optional
Valid values: 0 - 900
The number of Loss of Power Seconds
encountered by an ADSL interface, within any given
15 minutes performance data collection period,
atucthresh15minlprs
which causes the SNMP agent to send an
atucthresh15minlprs
'adslAtucPerfLprsThreshTrap'.
Type : Modify - Optional
Valid values: 0 - 900
The number of Errored Seconds encountered by an
ADSL interface, within any given 15 minutes
performance data collection period, which causes
atucthresh15miness
the SNMP agent to send an
atucthresh15miness
'adslAtucPerfESsThreshTrap'.
Type : Modify - Optional
Valid values: 0 - 900
Applies to 'Fast' channels only. Configured change
in rate causing an adslAtucRateChangeTrap. A trap
atucthreshfastrateup is produced when, ChanCurrTxRate >= ChanPre-
atucthreshfastrateup vTxRate plus the value of this object
Type : Modify – Optional
Valid values: 0 - 0xffff
Applies to 'Interleave' channels only. Configured
change in rate causing an
adslAtucRateChangeTrap. A trap is produced
atucthreshintlrateup
when, ChanCurrTxRate >= ChanPrevTxRate plus
atucthreshintlrateup
the value of this object.
Type : Modify -- Optional
Valid values: 0 - 0xffff
Applies to 'Fast' channels only. Configured change
in rate causing an adslAtucRateChangeTrap. A trap
atucthreshfastratedn is produced when, ChanCurrTxRate <=
atucthreshfastratedn ChanPrevTxRate minus the value of this object.
Type : Modify -- Optional
Valid values: 0 - 0xffff
Applies to 'Interleave' channels only. Configured
change in rate causing an
adslAtucRateChangeTrap. A trap is produced
atucthreshintlratedn
when, ChanCurrTxRate <= ChanPrevTxRate minus
atucthreshintlratedn
the value of this object.
Type : Modify -- Optional
Valid values: 0 - 0xffff

135
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM
Enables and disables the InitFailureTrap. This ob-
atucinitfailtrap ject is defaulted disable.
atucinitfailtrap Type : Modify -- Optional
Valid values: true, false
Enables/disables the OpStateChangeTrap.
atucoptrapenable
Type : Modify - Optional
atucoptrapenable
Valid values: true, false
The number of Loss of Frame Seconds
encountered by an ADSL interface, within any given
15 minutes performance data collection period,
aturthresh15minlofs
which causes the SNMP agent to send an
aturthresh15minlofs
'adslAturPerfLofsThreshTrap'.
Type : Modify -- Optional
Valid values: 0 - 900
The number of Loss of Signal Seconds
encountered by an ADSL interface, within any given
15 minutes performance data collection period,
aturthresh15minloss
which causes the SNMP agent to send an
aturthresh15minloss
'adslAturPerfLossThreshTrap'.
Type : Modify -- Optional
Valid values: 0 - 900
The number of Loss of Power Seconds
encountered by an ADSL interface, within any given
15 minutes performance data collection period,
aturthresh15minlprs
which causes the SNMP agent to send an
aturthresh15minlprs
'adslAturPerfLprsThreshTrap'.
Type : Modify -- Optional
Valid values: 0 - 900
The number of Errored Seconds encountered by an
ADSL interface, within any given 15 minutes
performance data collection period, which causes
aturthresh15miness
the SNMP agent to send an
aturthresh15miness
'adslAturPerfESsThreshTrap'.
Type : Modify -- Optional
Valid values: 0 - 900
Applies to 'Fast' channels only. Configured change
in rate causing an adslAturRateChangeTrap. A trap
aturthreshfastrateup is produced when, ChanCurrTxRate >
aturthreshfastrateup ChanPrevTxRate plus the value of this object.
Type : Modify -- Optional
Valid values: 0 - 900
Applies to 'Interleave' channels only. Configured
change in rate causing an
adslAturRateChangeTrap. A trap is produced
aturthreshintlrateup
when, ChanCurrTxRate > ChanPrevTxRate plus
aturthreshintlrateup
the value of this object.
Type : Modify -- Optional
Valid values: 0 - 900
Applies to 'Fast' channels only. Configured change
in rate causing an adslAturRateChangeTrap. A trap
aturthreshfastratedn is produced when, ChanCurrTxRate <
aturthreshfastratedn ChanPrevTxRate minus the value of this object.
Type : Modify -- Optional
Valid values: 0 - 900
Applies to 'Interleave' channels only. Configured
change in rate causing an
adslAturRateChangeTrap. A trap is produced
aturthreshintlratedn
when, ChanCurrTxRate < ChanPrevTxRate minus
aturthreshintlratedn
the value of this object.
Type : Modify -- Optional
Valid values: 0 - 900

Example $ get adsl alarm profile ifname dsl-0

Output Verbose Mode On

136
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM
IfName : dsl-0
ADSL ATUC Configuration :
--------------------------
Thresh 15Min Lofs(sec) : 10 Thresh 15Min Loss(sec) : 20
Thresh 15Min Lols(sec) : 30 Thresh 15Min Lprs(sec) : 50
Thresh 15Min Ess(sec) : 40 Thresh Fast Rate Up(bps) : 70
Thresh Intl Rate Up(bps) : 30 Thresh Fast Rate Down(bps) :
10
Thresh Intl Rate Down(bps) : 30 Init Fail Trap : true
OpStateTrapEnable : false
ADSL ATUR Configuration :
--------------------------
Thresh 15Min Lofs(sec) : 10 Thresh 15Min Loss(sec) : 10
Thresh 15Min Lprs(sec) : 10 Thresh 15Min Ess(sec) : 10
Thresh Fast Rate Up(bps) : 10 Thresh Intl Rate Up(bps) :
10
Thresh Fast Rate Down(bps) : 10 Thresh Intl Rate Down(bps) :
10

Output Fields
Field Description
The ADSL alarm interface name, whose profile is to
IfName
be modified or viewed.
The number of Loss of Frame Seconds
encountered by an ADSL interface, within any given
Thresh 15Min
15 minutes performance data collection period,
Lofs(sec)
which causes the SNMP agent to send an
'adslAtucPerfLofsThreshTrap'.
The number of Loss of Signal Seconds
encountered by an ADSL interface, within any given
Thresh 15Min
15 minutes performance data collection period,
Loss(sec)
which causes the SNMP agent to send an
'adslAtucPerfLossThreshTrap'.
The number of Loss of Link Seconds encountered
by an ADSL interface, within any given 15 minutes
Thresh 15Min
performance data collection period, which causes
Lols(sec)
the SNMP agent to send an
'adslAtucPerfLol-sThreshTrap'.
The number of Loss of Power Seconds
encountered by an ADSL interface, within any given
Thresh 15Min
15 minutes performance data collection period,
Lprs(sec)
which causes the SNMP agent to send an
'adslAtucPerfLprsThreshTrap'.
The number of Errored Seconds encountered by an
ADSL interfac,e within any given 15 minutes
Thresh 15Min
performance data collection period, which causes
Ess(sec)
the SNMP agent to send an
'adslAtucPerfESsThresh-Trap'.
Applies to 'Fast' channels only. Configured change
Thresh Fast Rate in rate causing an adslAtucRateChangeTrap. A trap
Up(bps) is produced when, ChanCurrTxRate >=
ChanPrevTxRate plus the value of this object.
Applies to 'Interleave' channels only. Configured
change in rate causing an
Thresh Intl Rate
adslAtucRateChangeTrap. A trap is produced
Up(bps)
when, ChanCurrTxRate >= ChanPrevTxRate plus
the value of this object.
Applies to 'Fast' channels only. Configured change
Thresh Fast Rate in rate causing an adslAtucRateChangeTrap. A trap
Down(bps) is produced when, ChanCurrTxRate <= ChanPre-
vTxRate minus the value of this object.
Applies to 'Interleave' channels only. Configured
change in rate causing an
Thresh Intl Rate
adslAtucRateChange-Trap. A trap is produced
Down(bps)
when, ChanCurrTxRate <= ChanPrevTxRate minus
the value of this object.
Init Fail Trap Enables and disables the InitFailureTrap. This

137
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM
object is, by default disable.
OpStateTrapEnable Enables/disables the OpStateChangeTrap.
The number of Loss of Frame Seconds
encountered by an ADSL interface, within any given
Thresh 15Min
15 minutes performance data collection period,
Lofs(sec)
which causes the SNMP agent to send an
'adslAturPerfLofsThreshTrap'.
The number of Loss of Signal Seconds
encountered by an ADSL interface, within any given
Thresh 15Min
15 minutes performance data collection period,
Loss(sec)
which causes the SNMP agent to send an
'adslAturPerfLossThreshTrap'.
The number of Loss of Power Seconds
encountered by an ADSL interface, within any given
Thresh 15Min
15 minutes performance data collection period,
Lprs(sec)
which causes the SNMP agent to send an
'adslAturPerfLprsThreshTrap'.
The number of Errored Seconds encountered by an
ADSL interface, within any given 15 minutes
Thresh 15Min
performance data collection period, which causes
Ess(sec)
the SNMP agent to send an
'adslAturPerfESsThreshTrap'.
Applies to 'Fast' channels only. Configured change
Thresh Fast Rate in rate causing an adslAturRateChangeTrap A trap
Up(bps) is produced when, ChanCurrTxRate >
ChanPrevTxRate plus the value of this object.
Applies to 'Interleave' channels only. Configured
change in rate causing an
Thresh Intl Rate
adslAturRateChangeTrap. A trap is produced
Up(bps)
when, ChanCurrTxRate > ChanPrevTxRate plus
the value of this object.
Applies to 'Fast' channels only. Configured change
Thresh Fast Rate in rate causing an adslAturRateChangeTrap. A trap
Down(bps) is produced when, ChanCurrTxRate <
ChanPrevTxRate minus the value of this object.
Applies to 'Interleave' channels only. Configured
change in rate causing an
Thresh Intl Rate
adslAturRateChange-Trap A trap is produced
Down(bps)
when, ChanCurrTxRate < ChanPrevTxRate minus
the value of this object.

Caution None

References • ADSL commands.

5.5.31 ADSL ATUR Trapsext Commands

get adsl atur trapsext

Description: This command is used to get.
Command Syntax: get adsl atur trapsext [ ifname ifname ]

Example $ get adsl atur trapsext ifname dsl-0

Output Ifname : dsl-0

SesL Thresh 15Min Trap : 1 UasL Thresh 15Min Trap : 0
Lofs Thresh 1Day Trap : 1 Loss Thresh 1Day Trap : 0
Lprs Thresh 1Day Trap : 1 ESs Thresh 1Day Trap : 1
SesL Thresh 1Day Trap : 1 UasL Thresh 1Day Trap : 0

Output field description

138
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM

Field Description
Ifname The ADSL Interface Name
SesL Thresh 15Min Severely Errored Seconds 15-minute interval
Trap threshold reached
UasL Thresh 15Min Unavailable Errored Seconds 15-minute interval
Trap threshold reached
Lofs Thresh 1Day
Loss of Frames 1-day interval threshold reached
Trap
Loss Thresh 1Day
Loss of Signal 1-day interval threshold reached
Trap
Lprs Thresh 1Day
Loss of Power 1-day interval threshold reached
Trap
ESs Thresh 1Day
Errored Seconds 1-day interval threshold reached
Trap
SesL Thresh 1Day Severely Errored Seconds 1-day interval threshold
Trap reached
UasL Thresh 1Day Unavailable Errored Seconds 1-day interval
Trap threshold reached

Caution • None
References • ADSL Commands

5.5.32 ADSL ATUC Trapsext Commands

get adsl atuc trapsext

Description: Use this command to get.
Command Syntax: get adsl atuc trapsext [ ifname ifname ]

Example $ get adsl atuc trapsext ifname dsl-0

Output Ifname : dsl-0
Failed FastR Thresh 15Min Trap : 1 SesL Thresh 15Min Trap :
1
UasL Thresh 15Min Trap : 1 Lofs Thresh 1Day Trap : 0
Loss Thresh 1Day Trap : 1 Lols Thresh 1Day Trap : 1
Lprs Thresh 1Day Trap : 1 ESs Thresh 1Day Trap : 0
SesL Thresh 1Day Trap : 0 UasL Thresh 1Day Trap : 1

Output field description

Field Description
Ifname The IfIndex of DSL port.
Failed FastR Thresh
Failed retrains 15-minute interval threshold reached
15Min Trap
SesL Thresh 15Min Severely Errored Seconds 15-minute interval
Trap threshold reached
UasL Thresh 15Min Unavailable Errored Seconds 15-minute interval
Trap threshold reached
Lofs Thresh 1Day Trap Loss of Frames 1-day interval threshold reached
Loss Thresh 1Day
Loss of Signal 1-day interval threshold reached
Trap
Lols Thresh 1Day Trap Loss of Link 1-day interval threshold reached
Lprs Thresh 1Day Trap Loss of Power 1-day interval threshold reached
ESs Thresh 1Day Trap Errored Seconds 1-day interval threshold reached
SesL Thresh 1Day Severely Errored Seconds 1-day interval threshold
Trap reached
UasL Thresh 1Day Unavailable Errored Seconds 1-day interval
Trap threshold reached

139
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM

Caution None.

5.5.33 ADSL Alarm Profilext Commands

get adsl alarm profilext

Description: This command is used to get.
Command Syntax: get adsl alarm profilext [ ifname ifname ]

5.5.34 ADSL ATUC Physical Commands

get adsl atuc physical

Description: Use this command to get ATUC physical interfaces.
Command Syntax: get adsl atuc physical [ifname interface-name]

Parameters

Example $ get adsl atuc physical ifname dsl-0

Output Verbose Mode On

140
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM

Output Fields
FIELD Description
Ifname The ADSL ATUC physical interface name.
The vendor specific string that identifies the
Serial Number
vendor equipment.
Vendor ID Vendor ID code.
The vendor specific version number sent by this
Version Number
ATU as part of the initialization messages.

Curr Status Indicates current state of the ATUC line. This is

a bit-map of possible conditions.
Noise Margin as seen by this ATU with respect
Curr Snr Margin(dB/10)
to its received signal in tenth dB.
Measured difference in the total power
Curr Atn(dB/10) transmitted by the peer ATU and the total power
received by this ATU.
Indicates the maximum currently attainable data
CurrAttainable Rate(bps) rate by the ATU. This value will be equal to, or
greater than the current line rate.
Measured total output power transmitted by this
Curr Output Pwr(dB/10) ATU. This is the measurement that was
reported during the last activation sequence.
GsOpState Operational state of the Xcvr.
Actual standard used for connection, based on
GsActualStandard the outcome of the negotiation with the Remote
Unit.
GsTxAtmCellCounter Provides Tx ATM cell counter.
GsRxAtmCellCounter Provides Rx ATM cell counter.

141
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM
Defines the current detailed start up state of
Xcvr. 0x0 – startup not in progress; 0x0 –
0x0FFF Handshake/ Training/ Profile
GsStartProgress
Management/ Fast Retrain in progress;
0x8000 – 0x8FFF DSP firmware Down-Load in
progress; 0xF000 – 0xFFFF illegal Parameter
Provides the number of bit errors detected
GsBertError
during BERT.
Bin Number Bin index.
Number of bits/ bin for the bin indexed by this
element of the string. The 0th element contains
Number of bits/bin the number of bits per bin for 0, through the 31st
element, which contains the number bits for bin
31.
GsIdleBertError Number of bit errors.
GsIdleBertCell Number of idle cells.
GsBertSync Indicates whether the Signal is in Sync or not.
Indicates the Result of the Parametric Test
GsParametricTestResult
conducted on the Xcvr.
Indicates the information validity for the SELT
GsSeltInfoValid
operation conducted on the Xcvr.
Indicates the LOOP Length in Feet once when
GsSeltLoopLen (in Feet)
the SELT information is valid on the Xcvr.
Indicates whether the loop is short or open once
GsSeltLoopEnd
when the SELT information is valid on the Xcvr.
Indicates the LOOP wire gauge information
GsSeltLoopGauge once, when the SELT information is valid on the
Xcvr.
GsSeltUpShannonCap Indicates the upstream shannon capacity once,
(in bps) when the SELT information is valid on the Xcvr.
Indicates the downstream shannon capacity
GsSeltDownShannonCap
once, when the SELT information is valid on the
(in bps)
Xcvr.
GlobespanVirata parameter that indicates
Data Boost Status whether DataBoost is utilized for the
connection.
GlobespanVirata parameter that indicates the
Parametric Info
Parametric Test Array.

Caution None

References • ADSL commands.

5.5.35 ADSL ATUC Channel Commands

get adsl atuc channel

Description: Use this command to get ADSL ATUC channels.
Command Syntax: get adsl atuc channel [ifname interface-name]

Example $ get adsl atuc channel ifname dsli-0

Output Verbose Mode On

Ifname : dsli-0
Interleave Delay(ms): 20 Curr Tx Rate(bps) : 80
Prev Tx Rate(bps) : 40 Crc Block Length(byte) : 90
Gs Curr Atm Status : OK GsSymbolsPerRsWord : 10
GsRsDepth : 20 GsRedundantBytesPerRsCode : 100

142
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM
Output Fields
FIELD Description
Ifname The ADSL ATUC channel interface name.
Interleave Delay(ms) Interleave delay for this channel.
Curr Tx Rate(bps) Actual transmit rate on this channel.
The rate at the time of the last
Prev Tx Rate(bps)
adslAtucRateChangeTrap event.
Indicates the length of the channel
Crc Block Length(byte)
data-block, on which the CRC operates.
Gs Curr Atm Status Indicates the current ATM Status.
Indicates the number of DMT symbols per
GsSymbolsPerRsWord Reed-Solomon code word (S), in the
downstream direction.
Indicates interleaving depth (D), in the
GsRsDepth
downstream direction.
Indicates the number of redundant bytes
(R), per
GsRedundantBytesPerRsCode
Reed-Solomon code in the downstream
direction

Caution None
References • ADSL commands.

get adsl atuc chanperf

Description: This command is used to get.
Command Syntax: get adsl atuc chanperf [ifname interface-name] Parameters

Example $ get adsl atuc chanperf ifname dsli-0

Output Verbose Mode On

Ifname : dsli-0
Perf Valid Intervals : 20
Perf Invalid Intervals : 30
PerfData Curr15Min Curr1Day Prev1Day
Time Elapsed/Monitored(sec) 15 10 20 45
Rx Blocks 10 45 30 89
Tx Blocks 20 65 70 48
Corrected Blocks 25 35 35 25
Uncorrected Blocks 30 95 80 30
NCD Count 90 86 35 20
OCD Count 60 42 15 20
HEC Count 45 21 75 35

Output Fields
FIELD Description
Ifname The ADSL ATUC channel interface name.
Number of previous 15-minute intervals, for which
Perf Valid Intervals
the data was collected.
Number of previous 15-min intervals for which no
Perf Invalid Intervals
data is available
Time Elapsed/ Total elapsed seconds in the intervals – Curr15Min,
Monitored(sec) Curr1Day and Monitored seconds in Prev1Day.
Performance Data: Count of all encoded blocks
received on this channel since agent was reset.
Curr15Min/Curr1Day/Prev1Day: Count of all
Rx Blocks
encoded blocks received on this channel in the
current 15 minute/ current 1 day/ previous 1 day
interval.

143
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM
Performance Data : Count of all encoded blocks
transmitted on this channel since agent reset.
Curr15Min/Curr1Day/Prev1Day: Count of all
Tx Blocks
encoded blocks transmitted on this channel in the
current 15-minute/ current 1-day/ previous 1-day
interval.
Performance Data: Count of all encoded blocks
received with corrected errors on this channel since
agent reset. Curr15Min/Curr1Day/Prev1Day: Count
Corrected Blocks
of all encoded blocks received with corrected errors
on this channel, in the current 15 minute/ current 1
day/ previous 1 day interval.
Performance Data: Count of all encoded blocks
received with uncorrected errors on this channel
since agent wasreset.
Uncorrected Blocks Curr15Min/Curr1Day/Prev1Day: Count of all
encoded blocks received with uncorrected errors on
this channel in the current 15 minute/ current 1 day/
previous 1 day interval.
Performance Data : Number of packets with NCD
(No Cell Delineation) error.
NCD Count Curr15Min/Curr1Day/Prev1Day: Number of packets
with NCD error received in the current 15-minute/
current 1-day/ previous 1-day interval.
Performance Data : Number of packets with OCD
(Out of Cell Delineation) error.
OCD Count Curr15Min/Curr1Day/Prev1Day: Number of packets
with OCD error received in the current 15-minute/
current 1-day/ previous 1-day interval.
Performance Data : Number of packets with HEC
error. Curr15Min/Curr1Day/Prev1Day : Number of
HEC Count
packets with HEC error received in the current 15
minute/ current 1 day/ previous 1 day interval.

Caution None

References • ADSL Commands.

5.5.36 ADSL ATUC Channel Interval Commands

get adsl atuc chanintrvl

Description: This command is used to get.
Command Syntax: get adsl atuc chanintrvl ifname interface-name [sintrvl
start-interval-number] [nintrvl num-of-intervals]

Parameters
Name Description
The ADSL atuc channel interface name whose
ifname performance data collection interval is to be viewed
interface-name Type: Get – Mandatory
Valid values : dsli-0 - *, dslf-0 - *
Start interval number
sintrvl Type: Get – Optional
start-interval-number Valid values : 1- 96
Default Value : 1
Number of intervals.
nintrvl
Type: Get – Optional
num-of-intervals
Valid values : 1- 96

144
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM
Default Value : 12

Example $ get adsl atuc chanintrvl ifname dsli-0 sintrvl 1 nintrvl 1

Output Ifname : dsli-0 IntervalNumber : 1

Rx Blocks : 10 Tx Blocks : 45
Corrected Blocks : 20 Uncorrected Blocks : 1
Gs Time Elapsed(sec) : 30 Valid Data : true
GsNoCellDelineation : 20 GsHeaderErrorCheck : 10
GsOutOfCellDelineation :50

Output Fields
FIELD Description
Ifname The ADSL ATUC channel interface name.
IntervalNumber Performance Data Interval number.
Count of all encoded blocks received on this
Rx Blocks
channel during this interval.
Count of all encoded blocks transmitted on this
Tx Blocks
channel during this interval.
Count of all encoded blocks received with errors
Corrected Blocks that were corrected on this channel during this
interval.
Count of all encoded blocks received with
Uncorrected Blocks uncorrected errors on this channel during this
interval.
Gs Time Elapsed(sec) Total time elapsed (in seconds) in this interval.
Valid Data Indicates if the data for this interval is valid.
Count of no cell delineation on this channel for this
GsNoCellDelineation
interval.
Header error check counter on this channel during
GsHeaderErrorCheck
this interval.
Count of out cell delineation on this channel for this
GsOutOfCellDelineation
interval.
Caution None

References • ADSL Commands.

5.5.37 ADSL ATUC Trap Commands

get adsl atuc traps

Description: This command is used to get.
Command Syntax: get adsl atuc traps [ifname interface-name]

Example $ get adsl atuc traps ifname dsl-0

Output Verbose Mode On

Ifname : dsl-0
Lofs Thresh Trap : 0 Loss Thresh Trap : 1
Lols Thresh Trap : 0 Lprs Thresh Trap : 1
ESs Thresh Trap : 1 Init Failure Trap : 1
Rate Change Trap : 0 Gs OpState Trap : 1

Output Fields
FIELD Description

145
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM
Ifname The ADSL interface name.
Lofs Thresh Trap Loss of Framing 15 minute threshold reached.
Loss Thresh Trap Loss of Signal 15 minute threshold reached.
Lols Thresh Trap Loss of Link 15 minute threshold reached.
Lprs Thresh Trap Loss of Power 15 minute threshold reached.
ESs Thresh Trap Errored Second 15 minute threshold reached.
Init Failure Trap ATUC initialization failed.
Rate Change Trap ATUC transmit rate has changed.
Gs OpState Trap Op State change of Line.

Caution None

References • ADSL commands.

5.5.38 ADSL ATUC Perf Commands

get adsl atuc perf

Description: This command is used to get.
Command Syntax: get adsl atur physical [ifname ifname]

Parameters
Name Description
The ADSL Interface Name
ifname ifname Type : Get -- Optional
Valid values: dsl-0 - dsl-*

5.5.39 ADSL ATUC Interval Commands

get adsl atuc interval

Description: This command is used to get.

Command Syntax: get adsl atuc interval ifname interface-name [sintrvl
start-interval-number] [nintrvl num-of-intervals]

Parameters
Name Description
The ADSL ATUC channel interface name, for which performance
data collection interval is to be viewed.
ifname interface-name
Type : Get – Mandatory
Valid values : dsl-0, dsl-*
Start interval number.
Sintrvl Type : Get – Optional
start-interval-number Valid values : 1- 96
Default Value : 1
Number of intervals.
Type : Get – Optional
Nintrvl num-of-intervals
Valid values : 1- 96
Default Value : 12

146
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM

5.5.40 ADSL ATUR Physical Commands

get adsl atur physical

Description: This command is used to get.
Command Syntax: get adsl atur physical [ifname ifname]

Parameters
Name Description
The ADSL Interface Name
ifname ifname Type : Get -- Optional
Valid values: dsl-0 - dsl-*

5.5.41 ADSL ATUR Channel Commands

get adsl atur channel

Description: This command is used to get.
Command Syntax: get adsl atur channel [ifname ifname]

Parameters
Name Description
The ADSL Interface Name
ifname ifname Type : Get -- Optional
Valid values: dsli-0 - dsli-* ,dslf-0 - dslf-*

5.5.42 ADSL ATUR Trap Commands

get adsl atur traps

Description: This command is used to get.
Command Syntax: get adsl atur traps [ifname ifname]

Parameters
Name Description
The ADSL Interface Name
ifname ifname Type :Get -- Optional
Valid values: dsl-0 - dsl-*

5.5.43 ADSL ATUR Perf Commands

get adsl atur perf

Description: This command is used to get.
Command Syntax: get adsl atur perf [ifname ifname]

Parameters

147
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM

Name Description
The ADSL Interface Name
ifname ifname Type :Get -- Optional
Valid values: dsl-0 - dsl-*

5.5.44 ADSL ATUR Interval Commands

get adsl atur interval

Description: This command is used to get.
Command Syntax: get adsl atur interval ifname ifname [sintrvl sintrvl] [ nintrvl
nintrvl]

Parameters
Name Description
The ADSL interface name.
ifname ifname Type : Get – Mandatory
Valid values: dsl-0 – dsl-*.
Start interval number. Performance Data Interval
number 1 is the most recent previous interval;
sintrvl sintrvl interval 96 is 24 hours ago.
Type : Get – Optional Valid values : 1- 96
Default Value : 1
Number of 15 minutes intervals.
Type : Get Optional
nintrvl nintrvl
Valid values: 1 - 96
Default value: 12

Example $ get adsl atur interval ifname dsl-0 sintrvl 1 nintrvl 1

Output Verbose Mode On

Ifname : dsl-0
IntervalNumber : 1 IntervalValidData : true
IntervalLofs(sec) : 10 IntervalLoss(sec) : 10
IntervalLprs(sec) : 10 IntervalESs(sec) : 10
IntervalSesl(sec) : 10 IntervalUasL(sec) : 10

Output Fields
FIELD Description
Ifname The ADSL interface name.
IntervalNumber Count from 1 through 96, of 15 minute intervals.
This indicates if the data for this interval is valid.
IntervalValidData
Count of seconds in the interval when there was
IntervalLofs(sec)
Loss of Framing.
Count of seconds in the interval when there was
IntervalLoss(sec)
Loss of Signal.
Count of seconds in the interval when there was
IntervalLprs(sec)
Loss of Power.
Count of Errored Seconds in the interval. The
errored second parameter is a count of one-second
IntervalESs(sec)
intervals containing one or more crc anomalies, or
one or more los or sef defects.
Count of seconds in the interval when there was
IntervalSesl(sec)
severely errored seconds.
IntervalUasL(sec) Count of seconds in the interval when there was

148
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM
unavailable errored seconds.

Caution None

References • ADSL commands

5.5.45 ADSL ATUR Chanperf Commands

get adsl atur chanperf

Description: This command is used to get.
Command Syntax: get adsl atur chanperf [ ifname ifname ]

Example $ get adsl atur chanperf ifname dsli-0

Output Verbose Mode On

Ifname : dsli-0
Perf Valid Intervals : 20
Perf Invalid Intervals : 30
PerfData Curr15Min Curr1Day Prev1Day
Time Elapsed/Monitored(sec) - 10 20 45
Rx Blocks 10 45 30 89
Tx Blocks 20 65 70 48
Corrected Blocks 25 35 35 25
Uncorrected Blocks 30 95 80 30
NCD Count 90 86 35 20
HEC Count 45 21 75 35

Output Fields
FIELD Description
Ifname The ADSL interface name.
Number of previous 15-minute intervals, for which
Perf Valid Intervals
the data was collected.
Number of previous 15- minute intervals, for which
Perf Invalid Intervals
no data is available.
Time Elapsed/ Total elapsed seconds in the intervals – Curr15Min,
Monitored(sec) Curr1Day and Monitored seconds in Prev1Day.
Performance Data: Count of all encoded blocks
received on this channel, since agent was reset.
Curr15Min/Curr1Day/Prev1Day : Count of all
Rx Blocks
encoded blocks received on this channel in the
current 15 minute/ current 1 day/ previous 1 day
interval.
Performance Data: Count of all encoded blocks
transmitted on this Channel, since agent reset.
Curr15Min/Curr1Day/Prev1Day: Count of all
Tx Blocks
encoded blocks transmitted on this channel in the
current 15-minute/ current 1-day/ previous 1-day
interval.
Performance Data: Count of all encoded blocks
received with corrected errors on this channel,
since agent reset.
Corrected Blocks Curr15Min/Curr1Day/Prev1Day: Count of all
encoded blocks received with corrected errors on
this channel, in the current 15 minute/ current 1
day/ previous 1 day interval.
Performance Data: Count of all encoded blocks
Uncorrected Blocks received with uncorrected errors on this channel,
since agent was reset.

149
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM
Curr15Min/Curr1Day/Prev1Day : Count of all
encoded blocks received with uncorrected errors on
this channel, in the current 15 minute/ current 1
day/ previous 1 day interval.
Performance Data: Number of packets with NCD
(No Cell Delineation) errors.
NCD Count Curr15Min/Curr1Day/Prev1Day: Number of packets
with NCD error, received in the current 15-minute/
current 1-day/ previous 1-day interval.
Performance Data: Number of packets with HEC
error. Curr15Min/Curr1Day/Prev1Day: Number of
HEC Count
packets with HEC error received in the current 15
minute/ current 1 day/ previous 1 day interval.

Caution None
References • ADSL commands

5.5.46 ADSL ATUR Chanintrvl Commands

get adsl atur chanintrvl

Description: This command is used to get.

Command Syntax: get adsl atur chanintrvl ifname ifname [sintrvl sintrvl]
[nintrvl nintrvl]

Parameters
Name Description
The ADSL interface name.
ifname ifname Type : Get – Mandatory
Valid values: dsli-0 – dsli-*, dslj-0 – dslj- *.
Start interval number. Performance Data Interval number 1 is the
most recent previous interval; interval 96 is 24 hours ago.
sintrvl sintrvl Type : Get – Optional
Valid values : 1- 96
Default Value : 1
Number of 15 minutes intervals.
Type : Get -- Optional
nintrvl nintrvl
Valid values: 1 - 96
Default value: 12

5.5.47 System Configuration Save And Restore Commands

commit
Description: Use this command to commit the active configuration to the
flash.
Command Syntax: commit

Parameters
None

150
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM

reboot
Description: Use this command to reboot the system and to set the boot
configuration.
Command Syntax: reboot [control <nvram|network>] [dataplane
<nvram|network>] [config <network | default | last |
backup | clean | minimum >]

Parameters
Name Description
This specifies whether the control plane binaries are to be fetched
from the network or the binaries already present in NVRAM are to be
control
used.
<nvram|network>
Type : Optional
Default value: Binary present in NVRAM.
This specifies whether the data plane binaries are to be fetched from
the network or the binaries already present in NVRAM are to be
dataplane
used.
<nvram|network>
Type: Optional
Default value: Binaries present in NVRAM.
This specifies the boot configuration – the
<last|backup|clean|minimum> source, from which to boot up. The
boot configuration is set to last automatically, whenever a commit
command is given. The boot configuration being an optional
parameter, if it is not specified, it retains the previous value. So
giving reboot after a commit will result in a reboot from the committed
configuration.
Default: Use Default factory configuration while booting up.
Backup: Use the Backup configuration to boot the system.
config Last: Use last committed configuration to boot the system.
<network|default| Minimum: Use a configuration in which:
last|backup|clean|mini • the size command is executed.
mum> • the user (login name and password as root) is created.
• an Ethernet interface with IP address 192.168.1.1 mask
255.255.0.0 is created.
Clean: The system comes up with nothing configured.
Network: The system fetches the default configuration file from the
remote host and system comes up with this default configuration.
Type : Optional
Default value: If a reboot is being given for the first time, then the
default value is default. Otherwise, the default value is the same as
what was given the last time.

5.5.48 System Control Table Commands

create user
Description: Use this command to create a user account. A maximum
two accounts can exist.
Command Syntax: create user name user-name passwd password
[root/user]

delete user
Description: Use this command to delete a user login.
Command Syntax: delete user name user-name

151
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM

get user
Description: Use this command to display information of all the users.
Password information isnot displayed.
Command Syntax: get user

Parameters
Name Description
This specifies the User Name to be created.
Type: Mandatory
Name user-name Valid values: String of up to 64 characters ( ‘A’- ‘Z’,
‘a’-‘z’, ‘0’-‘9’,’-‘,’_’) and any combination of printable
characters excluding “;”
This specifies the password required by this user to
login to the unit.
Type : Mandatory
passwd password
Valid values: String of up to 64 characters ( ‘A’- ‘Z’,
‘a’-‘z’, ‘0’-‘9’,’-‘,’_’) and any combination of printable
characters excluding “;”.
This indicates the privilege level of the user.
Root|user Type : Optional
Default value: user

Example $ create user name user1 passwd temp1 user

Output Verbose Mode On

Entry Created
Privilege UserName
----------------------
user user1
Verbose Mode Off
Entry Created

Output Fields
FIELD Description
UserName This shows the new user login, which has been created.
This represents the privilege level associated with the
Privilege
user name shown. It may be: user, root

passwd
Description: Use this command to change the password associated
with a user login. An ordinary user may change the
password for another user if he knows the old
password. However, the root does not need to know a
user’s existing password before changing it. The
passwords are not echoed on to the screen.
Command Syntax: passwd [user-id]

Parameters
Name Description

152
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM
The id of the user whose password is to be changed. If not
specified then the current user is assumed.
Type: Mandatory, if user is logged in through serial port and
User-id user authentication is disabled through serial port.
Otherwise, Optional.
Valid values: String of up to 64 characters (All printable
characters except ‘;‘)

Example Normal Usage

$passwd
Old Password:
New Password:
Confirm New Password:
Set Done.
Super User (for ordinary user)
$passwd User1
New Password:
Confirm New Password:
Set Done.

5.5.49 System Info Commands

get system info

Description: This command to get system parameters.
Command Syntax: get system info

modify system info

Description: Use this command to modify the system parameters.
Command Syntax: modify system info [contact sys-contact ] [name
sys-name ][location sys-location ] [vendor
sys-vendor-info ] [logthreshsys-log-threshold ] [systime
systime ] [dst <on |off>] [timezone <timezone> ]

Parameters
Name Description:
This contains the textual identification of the contact
person for this modem, together with information on
contact sys-contact how to contact this person
Type : Optional
Valid values: String of up to 63 ASCII Characters
This specifies the name of the modem
name sys-name Type : Optional
Valid values: String of up to 63 ASCII Characters
This specifies the physical location of this modem
Location sys-location Type : Optional
Valid values: String of up to 63 ASCII Characters
This contains the vendor-specific information
vendor sys-vendor-info Type : Optional
Valid values: String of up to 63 ASCII Characters
This specifies the severity level of the trap equal to
or lower than that shall be logged. 1 is the lowest
logthresh
and represents critical traps.
sys-log-threshold
Type: Optional
Valid values: 1-4

153
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM
This specifies the current system time.
Type: Optional
Valid values: System Time String in format. The to
Systime systime tal string length must be 20 characters. Single digits
should be prepended with a `0', e.g. `1' should be
given as `01' mon dd hh:mm:ss year e.g. "Feb 01
21:20:10 2001"
This specifies if the Daylight Savings Time has
been enabled or not.
dst <on | off>
Type: Optional
Valid values: on|off

Example $ get system info

Output Verbose Mode On

Crash Id : 1 Crash IU : 0
Time of Crash : Thu Jan 01 00:00:25 1970
Crash Cause : CP crashed after DP Init
PSR Reg : 0x940060de Wim Reg : 0x0
PC : 0x474204c nPC : 0x4742050
Y Reg MSW : 0x0 Y Reg LSW : 0x491f699
Trap Num : 0x92 Trap Base Reg : 0x4602920
Fault Status Reg : 0x14 Double Fault Reg : 0x9e0
IER : 0x2000
Alternate Window # 0x1f
Reg#:Local : In |Reg#:Local : In |
0 : 0x1 : 0x0 | 1 : 0x2 : 0x0
2 : 0x3 : 0x0 | 3 : 0x4 : 0x0
4 : 0x5 : 0x0 | 5 : 0x6 : 0x0
6 : 0x7 : 0x0 | 7 : 0x7 : 0x0
.....
Alternate Window # 0x18
Reg#:Local : In |Reg#:Local : In |
0 : 0x0 : 0x0 | 1 : 0x0 : 0x0
2 : 0x0 : 0x0 | 3 : 0x0 : 0x0
4 : 0x0 : 0x0 | 5 : 0x0 : 0x0
6 : 0x0 : 0x0 | 7 : 0x0 : 0x0
Current Standard Window Dump
Registers : Global : Out : Local : In
0 : 0x0 : 0x5848940 : 0x5844e34 : 0x5848940
1 : 0x940060e9 : 0x4d13d7a : 0x3b1a : 0x4d13d78
2 : 0x7 : 0x4741fd4 : 0x3800 : 0x2000000
3 : 0x18 : 0x8 : 0x3b18 : 0x4d13d78
4 : 0x0 : 0x4d13d80 : 0x5844e34 : 0x4d13d80
5 : 0x2050044c : 0x3b17 : 0x5854d0d : 0x3b14
6 : 0x58f3c00 : 0x4d13c18 : 0x1 : 0x4d13c90
7 : 0x0 : 0x471073c : 0x3b1c : 0x4700f28
CCP Register Dump
CCSR Register : 0x1a2a4021 CCCRC Register : 0x1ffffbbd
CCPR Register : 0xa2aabdfc
CCIR Register : 0xbabfbfe1 CCIBR Register : 0x3fd1ed7f
CCOBR Register : 0x44208200 CCOR Register : 0x9bb2eecc
Stack at the time of the Crash
StackDepth : CallAddress : Return Address: Frame Ptr : StackPtr
8 : 0x48ea65c : 0x471073c :0x4d13c18 : 0x4951e60
7 : 0x471073c : 0x4700f28 :0x4d13c90 : 0x4d13c18
6 : 0x4700f28 : 0x46eab20 :0x4d13d10 : 0x4d13c90
5 : 0x46eab20 : 0x46ea25c :0x4d14360 : 0x4d13d10
4 : 0x46ea25c : 0x46e9d20 :0x4d143e8 : 0x4d14360
3 : 0x46e9d20 : 0x48e356c :0x4d144f0 : 0x4d143e8

Output Fields
Field Description

Crash Id Crash Number

Crash IU Internal processor Number

Time of Crash This specifies the time at which the crash occurred.

154
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM
This specifies crash cause. Following are the
possi-blecauses: - Ctrl Transfer To CP Failed -
Crash in CP self processing - DP Init Failure - CP
Crash Cause
crashed after DP Init - DP crashed after DP Init - DP
internal Failure - System in Loop - Crash in DP
Processing
This specifies the value of Processor state
PSR Reg
registerat the time of crash.
Wim Reg Window Invalid Mask register
This specifies the value of Program counter at the
PC
time of crash.
This specifies the value of next Program Counter at
NPC
the time of crash.
This specifies the value of MSW of Y Register at the
Y Reg MSW
time of crash.
This specifies the value of LSW of Y Register at the
Y Reg LSW
time of crash.
Trap Num This specifies number of trap that caused the crash.
This specifies the value of Trap Base register at the
Trap Base Reg
time of crash.
This specifies the value of Fault Status Register at
Fault Status Reg
the time of crash.
This specifies the value of Double Fault Register at
Double Fault Reg
the time of crash.
This specifies the value of Implementation Exten
IER
sionRegister at the time of crash.
For crashes involving Alternate Windows, This
Alternate Window
Capture specifies of all local and input register
Capture
capture for Alternate Windows # 0x1f to 0x18.
Current Standard This specifies all global, input, local and output
Window Dump registers of standard window at the time of capture.
CCP Register Dump This specifies proprietary CCP register dump
This specifies the stack trace at the time of the
Stack at the time of crash. Display contains Return address and the
the Crash caller function addreses, along with the Stack and
the Frame pointer values.

Caution None

References • Get/modify nbsize

get rmon idletime

Description: Use this command to display a list of idle time records.
Command Syntax: get rmon idletime [numentries numentries]

Parameter
Name Description
This specifies last numentries idle time records to
be displayed
Type: Optional
Numentries numentries
Valid values : 1 to
GS_CFG_MAX_IDLE_TIME_RECORDS
Default : 10

. Example $ get rmon idletime numentries 1

Output $get rmon idletime numentries 1

Start Time End Time Total Idle Util %

155
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM
Time Time
----------------------------------------------------------------
Thu Jan 1 12:34:51 1970 Thu Jan 1 12:35:00 1970 10s 7s 30

Output Fields
FIELD Description
This specifies the starting time of the period for
Start Time
which the idle time was recorded
This specifies the end time of the period for which
End Time
the idle time was recorded
This specifies the total time (in seconds) elapsed in
Total Time
this period.
This specifies the time (in seconds) for which the
Idle Time
system was idle during this period.
This specifies the Utilization (in percentage) of the
Util %
system during this period

Caution None.

References None

5.5.50 System manuf info Commands

get system manuf info

Description: This command is used to display manufacturing text
information in the system.
Command Syntax: get system manuf info

Example $ get system manuf info

Output $get system manuf info
CpeUtopiaMode : Tx 16 Bit Rx 8 Bit
NetUtopiaMode : Tx 16 Bit Rx 8 Bit
CpeUtopiaMaster : True NetUtopiaMaster : False
MaxEthMacPhy : 2 ColumbiaIdSel : 18
CpeUtopiaFreq : 40 MHz
Eth Speed : 100 Mbps
S.No | SelfMacAddr | EthPortIdSel | EthType
---------------------------------------------------
1 | 00:BB:CC:DD:EE:FF | 16 | Data Mgmt
2 | 00:BB:CC:DD:EE:FE | 17 | Data Mgmt
Dsl manuf Text Info
---------------------
Num of LBRams : 2 Num of Chips : 2
Num of Ports : 24 Interface Type : Host Bus
Chip Type : G24
Serial Number : <co-0123456>
Vendor Id : FFBSGSPN
Version Number : Z3219
Chip No Base Addr LBRam
-------------------------------
1 0x84a00000 0
2 0x84a00c00 1
Logical To Physical Port Mapping
--------------------------------
[ 0-7 ] 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
[ 8 -15 ] 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
[16 -23 ] 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
[24 -31 ] 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
[32 -39 ] 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39
[40 -47 ] 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
UART manuf Text Info
---------------------
Num of UARTs : 1

156
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM
HSSL Port Id : 1 Baud Rate : 9600
Data Bits : 8 Stop Bit : 2
Parity : Even U ART Mode : Polling
Application Type : Console
$
$

Output Fields
FIELD Description
CpeUtopiaMode Mode of operation of CPE side Utopia interface
NetUtopiaMode Mode of operation of NET side Utopia interface
This specifies whether CPE side Utopia interface is
CpeUtopiaMaster
master
This specifies whether NET side Utopia interface is
NetUtopiaMaster
master
This specifies the maximum number of MACs that
MaxEthMacPhy
can be configured
Specifies the address bit in the PCI bus, which is
ColumbiaIdSel
connected to IDSEL pin of the Columbia
CpeUtopiaFreq CPE Frequency for Utopia Interface
This specifies the speed of operation. Supported
Eth Speed speeds are – 10 Mbps, 100 Mbps, and 1000 Mbps.
It is a bitmask.
SelfMacAddr This specifies the self MAC address
This specifies the address bit in the PCI bus, which
EthPortIdSel
is connected to IDSEL pin of the Ethernet device
This specifies the Defines the ethernet types – data
EthType
, mgmt, or both. It is a bitmask.
This specifies the number of LBRams in the
Num of LBRams
system.
Num of Chips This specifies the number of Chips in the system.
This specifies the number of Ports per Chip in the
Num of Ports
system.
This specifies the InterfaceType. Following are the
Interface Type
values it can take – Host Bus, PCI, Utopia
This specifies the Type of Chip – G24, G16, and
Chip Type
octane.
This specifies the vendor specific string that
Serial Number
identifies the vendor equipment.
Vendor Id This specifies the binary vendor identification field.
This specifies the vendor specific version number
Version Number sent by this ATU as part of the initialization
message
Base Addr This specifies the base address of the chip.
LBRam This specifies the LBRam associated with the chip
Logical To Physical This specifies the Logical To Physical Port
Port Mapping Mapping.
No of UARTs This specifies the number of UARTs configured.
HSSL Port Id This specifies the HSSL port to be used for UART.
Baud Rate This specifies the Baud Rate of the port
Data Bits This specifies the number of data bits to be used
This specifies the stop bits used on HSSL – 1, 2,
Stop Bit
1.5
This specifies the parity used on HSSL – even, odd,
Parity
none
This specifies the UART Mode – polling, interrupt
UART Mode
based
This specifies the application name using this
Application Type
UART.

157
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM

get system version

Description: This command is used to get the information of the
versions with which the system has come up.
Command Syntax: get system version

Example $ get system version

Output Verbose Mode On

Control Plane Binary : COL 2.6.0.0.040217

Data Plane Binary : DP_B02_06_19

Output Fields
FIELD Description

This tells about the version of the control plane

Control Plane Binary
binary with which the system has come up.

This tells about the version of the data plane binary

Data Plane Binary
with which the system has come up.

5.5.51 System reboot info command

get system reboot info

Description: This command is used for displaying a list of reboot
failures that were encountered when the system was
trying to come up.
Command Syntax: get system reboot info [numentries]

Example $ get system reboot info numentries 1

Output Verbose Mode On

CP Bin Version : 1.6
DP Bin Version : 1.8
Time of Reboot : Thu Jan 2 12:34:56 1970
Reboot Failure Cause : DP Init Failure
Reboot Type : Secondary CFG

Output Fields
FIELD Description
The control Plane Version with which the system
Control Plane Version
could not come up.
The data Plane Version with which the system
Data Plane Version
could not come up.
Time of Reboot Time at which the reboot failure occured.
This tells the type of reboot with which the system is
trying to come up. The various possible values
Type of Reboot
are :
Last, Back Up, Default, Minimum, Clean.

158
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM
This tells the various causes of failure that system
encountered while rebooting. It can be :-
Sdram CP Decompress failed
Nvram CP Decompress failed
Sdram DP Decompress failed
Nvram DP Decompress failed
DP Init Failure
Nvm CP Nvm DP CI Mismatch
Nvm CP Sdram DP CI Mismatch
Sdram CP Nvm DP CI Mismatch ＃
Sdram CP Sdram DP CI Mismatch
Sdram CP All DP CI Mismatch
Nvm CP All DP CI Mismatch
Failure Cause Applying Last cfg failed
Applying BackUp cfg failed
Applying Min cfg failed
Applying Nvm FD failed
Applying Sdram FD failed
Nvm CP Last CFG CI Mismatch
Nvm CP Backup CFG CI Mismatch
Sdram CP Last CFG CI Mismatch
Sdram CP Backup CFG CI Mismatch
NVRAM CP had invalid sign
SDRAM CP had invalid sign
Control Plane wrongly linked
CP mem req exceeds limit
Applying Clean cfg Failed

5.5.52 System Size Commands

get nbsize
Description: Use this command to view System Sizing parameters
available on next boot.
Command Syntax: get nbsize

modify nbsize
Description: Use this command to modify System Sizing parameters
available on next boot.
Command Syntax: modify nbsize [maxatmport max-atm-port]
[maxvcperport maxvcper-port] [maxvc max-vc]
[maxatmoam max-atm-oamactivities][maxrmon
max-rmon] [maxnumethprioQsmaxnumethprioQs]
[maxmulticast max-multicast][maxmac maxmac]
[maxhashbuck max-hash-bucket] [ maxnumvlan
max-numvlans][maxvlanidval
maxvlanidval ][maxnumacentrymaxnummacentry]
[devcap devcap]
[maxnumeoaprioQsmaxnumeoaprioQs] [bridgingmode
bridgingmode ][maxhpriotreenodes maxhpriotreenodes]
[maxlpriotreenodesmaxlpriotreenodes] [ maxClfrTrees
maxClfrTrees ][maxClfrProfiles
maxClfrProfiles ][maxinrules maxinrules] [maxoutrules
maxoutrules][maxinhpriosubrules maxinhpriosubrules]
[maxinlpriosubrulesmaxinlpriosubrules]
[maxouthpriosubrulesmaxouthpriosubrules]
[maxoutlpriosubrulesmaxoutlpriosubrules] [mcastcap
ivmcapable | svmcapable |none]

159
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM

Parameters
Name Description
Maximum number of ATM ports.
maxatmport
Type: Modify – Optional
max-atm-port
Valid values: 1- GS_CFG_MAX_ATM_PORT.
Maximum number of VCs possible per ATM port.
maxvcperport Type: Modify – Optional
max-vc-per-port Valid values:
1-GS_CFG_MAX_ATM_VC_PER_PORT.
Maximum number of VCs possible in the system.
Type: Modify – Optional
maxvc max-vc
Valid values : 1 – (GS_CFG_MAX_ATM_PORT *
GS_CFG_MAX_ATM_VC_PER_PORT)
Maximum number of OAM activities that can be
maxatmoam active at a time.
max-atm-oam-activities Type: Modify – Optional
Valid values : 1 – GS_CFG_MAX_OAM_ACT
Maximum number RMON probes that can be applied
simultaneously in the system.
maxrmon max-rmon Type: Modify – Optional
Valid values :
1 -GS_CFG_MAX_RMON_PROBES
This specifies the max number of priority
queues that can be configured on a bridge port
MaxnumethprioQs
maxnumethprioQs created over an ethernet interface.
Type: Modify – Optional
Valid values : 1 – GS_CFG_MAX_ETH_PRIO
Maximum number of multicast groups that can be
configured in the system.
maxmulticast
Type: Modify – Optional
max-multicast
Valid values :
1 – GS_CFG_MAX_MCAST_GROUPS
Maximum number of MAC addresses that can be
learned by the system. This should be multiples of
maxmac max-mac 32.
Type: Modify – Optional
Valid values : 1 – GS_CFG_MAX_MAC_ADDRS
Maximum number of hash buckets for the
Forwarding table. This value should be a power of 2.
maxhashbuck
(1, 2, 4, 8 ,...)
max-hash-bucket
Type: Modify – Optional
Valid values : 1 - GS_CFG_MAX_HASH_BKTS
This specifies the maximum number of Vlans
maxnumvlan Supported.
max-num-vlans Type: Modify – Optional
Valid values : 1 - GS_CFG_MAX_VLAN
This specifies the maximum value of Vlan Id that a
maxvlanidval bridge can support.
max-vlan-id-val Type: Modify – Optional
Valid values : 1 - GS_CFG_MAX_VLAN_ID
This specifies the maximum number of Static Ucast
Entries Supported.
maxnumacentry
Type: Modify – Optional
max-num-mac-entry
Valid values :
1 – GS_CFG_MAX_STATIC_ENTRIES
This specifies the capabilities of the device.
devcap devcap Type: Modify – Optional
Valid values : IVL, SVL, none

160
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM
This specifies the max number of priority queues that
can be configured on a bridge port created on EOA
maxnumeoaprioQs interface
maxnumeoaprioQs Type: Modify – Optional
Valid values :
1 – GS_CFG_MAX_EOA_PRIO_QUEUES
This specifies the state of full bridging on the bridge.
Value residential specifies that packets coming from
CPE side would be forwarded to the net side port
without a lookup. In case of restricted bridging, the
packets would undergo a lookup and if the destina-
bridgingmode
tion is another CPE port, the packet would be
bridgingmode
dropped, i.e. CPE to CPE traffic is not allowed. Un-
restricted bridging is forwarding based on lookup in
all cases.
Type: Modify – Optional
Valid values : residential, restricted, unrestricted
Maximum number of classifier tree nodes of high ac-
cess priority that can be created.
maxhpriotreenodes
Type : Modify - Optional
maxhpriotreenodes
Valid values :
1-GS_CFG_MAX_CLFR_TREE_NODE_MPRIO
Maximum number of classifier tree nodes of low ac
cess priority that can be created.
maxlpriotreenodes
Type : Modify - Optional
maxlpriotreenodes
Valid values : 1-
GS_CFG_MAX_CLFR_TREE_NODE_LPRI
Maximum number of classifier trees that can be cre
maxClfrTrees ated
maxClfrTrees Type: Modify – Optional
Valid values : 1 – GS_CFG_MAX_CLFR_TREE
Maximum number of classifier profiles that can be
created
maxClfrProfiles
Type: Modify – Optional
maxClfrProfiles
Valid values :
1 – GS_CFG_MAX_CLFR_PROFILES
Maximum number of generic filter ingress rules that
can be created.
maxinrules maxinrules Type: Modify - Optional
Valid values :
1-GS_CFG_MAX_GFLTR_RULES_INGRESS
Maximum number of generic filter egress rules that
can be created.
maxoutrules
Type: Modify - Optional
maxoutrules
Valid values : 1-
GS_CFG_MAX_GFLTR_RULES_EGRESS
Maximum number of generic filter ingress subrules of
high access priority that can be created.
maxinhpriosubrules Type: Modify - Optional
maxinhpriosubrules Valid values :
1-GS_CFG_MAX_GFLTR_SUBRULES_INGRESS_
MPRIO
Maximum number of generic filter ingress subrules of
low access priority that can be created.
maxinlpriosubrules Type: Modify - Optional
maxinlpriosubrules Valid values : 1-
GS_CFG_MAX_GFLTR_SUBRULES_INGRESS_
LPRIO
Maximum number of generic filter egress subrules of
high access priority that can be created.
maxouthpriosubrules Type: Modify - Optional
maxouthpriosubrules Valid values :
1-GS_CFG_MAX_GFLTR_SUBRULES_EGRESS_
MPRIO

161
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM
Maximum number of generic filter egress subrules of
low access priority that can be created.
maxoutlpriosubrules Type: Modify - Optional
maxoutlpriosubrules Valid values :
1-GS_CFG_MAX_GFLTR_SUBRULES_EGRESS_L
PRIO
It denotes the Multicast Device Capability
mcastcap ivmcapable |
Type: Modify – Optional
svmcapable | none
Valid values : ivmcapable, svmcapable

Example $ get nbsize

Output Verbose Mode On

Max ATM Ports : 80 Max VC per Port : 2

Max VCs : 200 Max OAM activities : 5
Max RMON probes : 30 Bridging Mode : Residential
Max Multicast groups : 50 Max MAC addresses : 256
Max Hash buckets : 40 Max VLANs : 10
Max VlanId Value : 10 Max Num Static Mac Entries : 5
Dev Capabilities : IVL
Max Num EOA Prio Qs : 1 Max Num Eth Prio Qs : 2
Max Tree Nodes : 2 Max Tree Branches : 3
Max Clfr Trees : 2 Max Tree Trees : 3
Mcast Capabilities : Svmcapable

Output Fields
FIELD Description
Max ATM Ports Maximum number of ATM ports.
Max VC per Port Maximum number of VCs possible per ATM port
Max VCs Maximum number of VCs possible in the system.
Maximum number of OAM activities that are active
Max OAM activities
at a time.
Maximum number RMON probes that can be
Max RMON probes
applied simultaneously in the system.
Maximum number of multicast groups that are
Max Multicast groups
configured in the system.
Maximum number of MAC addresses that are
Max MAC addresses
learned by the system.
Maximum number of hash buckets for the
Max Hash buckets Forwarding table. This value should be a power of
2. (1, 2, 4, 8 ,...)
Max VLANs Maximum number of Vlans Supported.
Maximum value of VLANID that the bridge can
Max VlanId Value
support.
Max Num Static Mac
Maximum number of static Unicast entries.
Entries
Dev Capabilities Device Capabilities of the bridge.
This specifies the max number of priority queues
Max Num Eth Prio Qs that can be configured on a bridge port created over
an ethernet interface.
This specifies the max number of priority queues
Max Num EOA Prio
that can be configured on a bridge port created on
Qs
EOA interface
This specifies the state of full bridging on the
bridge. Value residential specifies that packets
coming from CPE side would be forwarded to the
net side port without a lookup. In case of restricted
Bridging Mode bridging, the packets would undergo a lookup and if
the destination is another CPE port, the packet
would be dropped, i.e. CPE to CPE traffic is not
allowed. Unrestricted bridging is forwarding based
on lookup in all cases.
Maximum number of classifier tree nodes that can
Max Tree Nodes
be created

162
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM
Maximum number of classifier tree branches that
Max Tree Branches
can be created
Maximum number of classifier trees that can be
Max Clfr Trees
created
Mcast Capabilities It denotes the Multicast Device Capability

Caution None

References • get/modify system info

• get system stats.

5.5.53 System Stats Commands

get system stats

Description: Use this command to view System Statistics.
Command Syntax: get system stats

reset system stats

Description: Use this command to reset System Statistics.
Command Syntax: reset system stats

Example $ get system stats

Output Verbose Mode On

CPE Ucast Addr Count : 10 DnLink Ucast Addr Count : 80

NET Ucast Addr Count : 20 CPE Learn Entry Discards : 90
DnLink Learn Entry Discards : 30 NET Learn Entry Discards :
100
Dyn Addr Conflicts Static : 40 Moved Dyn Addrs Count : 110
Ucast Lookup Fail Count : 50 Mcast Lookup Fail Count : 120
Tx Ctl Pkts Count : 60 Rx Ctl Pkts Count : 130
Ctl Pkts Discards Count : 70

Output Fields
FIELD Description
Number of unicast addresses, which were
CPE Ucast Addr Count
learned from the CPE ports.
Number of unicast addresse,s which were
DnLink Ucast Addr Count
learned from the Downlink port.
Number of addresses which, were not
Learn Entry Discards learned from the CPE ports, due to lack of
space in the forwarding table.
Number of addresses which, were not
DnLink Learn Entry
learned from the Downlink port, due to lack
Discards
of space in the forwarding table.
Number of times a learned address
Dyn Addr Conflicts Static
conflicted with a static address.
Number of times a learned address moved
Moved Dyn Addrs Count
from one port to another.
Number of times Unicast address lookup
Ucast Lookup Fail Count
failed.
Number of times Multicast address lookup
Mcast Lookup Fail Count
failed.
Tx Ctl Pkts Count Number of packets sent to the Control

163
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM
module.
Number of packets received from Control
Rx Ctl Pkts Count
module.
Ctl Pkts Discards Count Number Control module packets discarded.
Number of unicast addresses which
NumNetUcastAddrCount
were learned from the Net ports.
Number of addresses, which were not
NumNetLearnEntryDiscards learned from the Net ports, due to lack
of space in the forwarding table.

Caution None

References • get/modify system info

• get/modify nbsize

5.5.54 System Traps Commands

reset traps
Description: Use this command to delete all trap logs.
Command Syntax: reset traps

Example $ reset traps

Output Set Done
Output Fields None

Caution None.
References • get traps command.

5.5.55 ACL Global Macentry Commands

get acl global macentry

Description: Use this command to get.
Command Syntax: get acl global macentry [ macaddr macaddr ]

create acl global macentry

Description: Use this command to create.
Command Syntax: create acl global macentry macaddr macaddr [ deny
disable |enable ] [ track disable | enable ]

modify acl global macentry

Description: Use this command to modify.
Command Syntax: modify acl global macentry macaddr macaddr [ deny
disable | enable ] [ track disable | enable ]

164
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM
Parameters
Name Description
Unicast Source MAC Address, which needs to be
tracked/denied access
macaddr macaddr
Type: Create --Mandatory Delete --Mandatory
Modify Mandatory Get Optional
This flag specifies if the MAC address is to be
deny disable | enable denied access.
Type: Create --Optional Modify Optional
Default value: enable
This flag specifies if the MAC address is to be
tracked accross different ports. A trap is raised
when packet from the address comes over a port
track disable | enable
for the first time and when it changes the port.
Type: Create --Optional Modify Optional
Default value: disable

Example $ create acl global macentry macaddr 00:01:34:a0:d1:34

deny enable track enable

Output Verbose Mode On

Entry Created

Mac Address : 00:01:34:a0:d1:34

Deny : enable Track : enable
Number of times Port changed : 2

Verbose Mode Off

Entry Created

Output field description

Field Description

Unicast Source MAC Address, which needs to be

Mac Address
tracked/denied access

This flag specifies if the MAC address is to be

Deny
denied access.

This flag specifies if the MAC address is to be

tracked accross different ports. A trap is raised in
Track
case packet from the address comes over a port for
the first time and when it changes the port.

Number of times Port This specifies the number of times port has been
changed changed by the MAC address.

Caution None

References None

165
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM

5.5.56 ACL Port Macentry Commands

get acl port macentry

Description: Use this command to get.
Command Syntax: get acl port macentry [ portid portid ] [ macaddr
macaddr ]

create acl port macentry

Description: Use this command to create.
Command Syntax: create acl port macentry portid portid macaddr macaddr

delete acl port macentry

Description: Use this command to delete.
Command Syntax: delete acl port macentry portid portid macaddr macaddr

Parameter
Name Description
Bridge Port Id, for which the port MAC Address
entry is created
portid portid Type: Create --Mandatory Delete --Mandatory
Get Optional
Valid values: 1 -GS_CFG_MAX_BRIDGE_PORTS
Unicast Source MAC Address, which is to be
allowed access over the particular port.
macaddr macaddr
Type: Create --Mandatory Delete --Mandatory
Get Optional

Example $ create acl port macentry portId 2 macaddr 00:01:34:a0:d1:34

Output Verbose Mode On

Entry Created

PortId : 2
Mac Address : 00:01:34:a0:d1:34

Verbose Mode Off

Entry Created

Output field description

Field Description
Bridge Port Id, for which the port MAC Address
PortId
entry is created
Unicast Source MAC Address, which is to be
allowed access over the particular port.
Mac Address

Caution None

References None

166
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM

5.5.57 SNTP Cfg Commands

get sntp cfg

Description: Use this command to get.
Command Syntax: get sntp cfg

modify sntp cfg

Description: Use this command to modify.
Command Syntax: modify sntp cfg [ enable | disable ]

Parameter
Name Description
This specifies whether the SNTP service is enabled
or disabled. True means that SNTP is enabled and
enable|disable False means that SNTP is disabled.
Type: Modify -- Optional
Valid values: enable, disable

Example $ modify sntp cfg enable

Output Verbose Mode On/Off

Status : Enable

Output field description

Name Description
This specifies whether the SNTP service is enabled
Status or disabled. True means that SNTP is enabled and
False means that SNTP is disab

Caution None.
References None.

5.5.58 SNTP Stats Commands

get sntp stats

Description: Use this command to get.
Command Syntax: get sntp stats

reset sntp stats

Description: Use this command to reset.
Command Syntax: reset sntp stats

Example $ get sntp stats

Output Verbose Mode On/Off
Status : Enable

Output field

167
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM

Field Description
This specifies the number of requests sent to SNTP
Requests count
Server.
This specifies the Number of responses received
Responses count
from SNTP Server.
Invalid Responses This specifies the Number of invalid responses
count received from SNTP Server.
Lost Responses This specifies the number of responses which do
count not come within time limit.
Last Time Stamp This specifies time at which the local clock was last
[MM/DD/ set or corrected. The display format shall be
YYYY::HH:MM:SS] mm/dd/ yyyy:hr:min:sec.

Caution None.
References None.

5.5.59 SNTP servaddr Commands

get sntp servaddr

Description: Use this command to get.
Command Syntax: get sntp servaddr

create sntp servaddr

Description: Use this command to create.
Command Syntax: create sntp servaddr

Example $ create sntp servaddr 172.23.3.45

Output Verbose Mode On

Entry Created

Server Addr : 172.23.3.45 Status : Standby

Verbose Mode Off

Entry Created

Output field description

Field Description
Server Addr This specifies the IP Address of the SNTP Server.
Server is in Use. OR Server is in standby mode i.e.
Status
not in use.

Caution None.

References None.

168
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM

5.5.60 SNMP Comm Commands

get snmp comm

Description: Use this command to get.
Command Syntax: get snmp comm [ community community ]

create snmp comm

Description: Use this command to create.
Command Syntax: create snmp comm community community [ access
ro | rw ]

delete snmp comm

Description: Use this command to delete.
Command Syntax: delete snmp comm community community

Parameter
Name Description
This specifies the Community name.
community
Type: Create --Mandatory Delete --Mandatory
community
Get Optional
This specifies the access permissions given to
managers with this community name. ro implies
Read Only permissions and rw implies Read-Write
access ro | rw
permissions.
Type: Create --Optional
Default value: ro

Example to create a snmp cummunity

$ create snmp comm community public

Output Verbose Mode On

Entry Created

Access community

ro public

Verbose Mode Off:

Entry Created

Example2 to create a read-rewritable community

$ create snmp comm community public rw

Output field description

Field Description
community This specifies the Community name.

169
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM
This specifies the access permissions given to
managers with this community name.ro implies
Access
Read Only permissions and rw implies Read-Write
permissions.

Caution None.
References • SNMP commands

5.5.61 SNMP Host Commands

get snmp host

Description: Use this command to get.
Command Syntax: get snmp host [ ip ip ] [ community community ]

create snmp host

Description: Use this command to create.
Command Syntax: create snmp host ip ip community community

delete snmp host

Description: Use this command to delete.
Command Syntax: delete snmp host ip ip community community

Parameter
Name Description
This specifies the IP address of the manager that
has access permissions.
ip ip
Type: Create --Mandatory Delete --Mandatory
Get Optional
This specifies the Community name. This must be a
community valid community in the snmp community table.
community Type: Create --Mandatory Delete –Mandatory
Get Optional

Example $ create snmp host ip 172.25.34.34 community

public

Output Verbose Mode On

Output field description

Field Description
This specifies the IP address of the manager that
Ip Address
has access permissions.

170
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM

This specifies the Community name. This must be a

Community
valid community in the snmp community table.

Caution None.
References • SNMP commands

171
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM

5.5.62 SNMP Stats Commands

snmp stats
Description: Use this command to get.
Command Syntax: get snmp stats

modify snmp stats

Description: Use this command to modify.

Command Syntax: modify snmp stats [ authentraps enable | disable ]

Parameter
Name Description
Indicates whether the SNMP agent process is
permitted to generate authentication-failure traps.
The value of this object overrides any configuration
authentraps enable
information; as such, it provides a means whereby
|disable
all authentication-failure traps may be disabled.
Type: Modify -- Optional
Default value: disable

Example $ get snmp stats

Output InPkts : 100 OutPkts : 100
InBadVersions : 0 InBadCommunityNames : 0
InBadCommunityUses : 0 InASNParseErrs : 0
InTooBigs : 0 InNoSuchNames : 0
InBadValues : 0 InReadOnlys : 0
InGenErrs : 0 InTotalReqVars : 200
InTotalSetVars : 0 InGetRequests : 100
InGetNexts : 0 InSetRequests : 0
InGetResponses : 0 InTraps : 0
OutTooBigs : 0 OutNoSuchNames : 0
OutBadValues : 0 OutGenErrs : 0
OutGetRequests : 0 OutGetNexts : 0
OutSetRequests : 0 OutGetResponses : 100
OutTraps : 0 AuthenTraps : disable
SilentDrops : 0 ProxyDrops : 0

Output field description

Field Description
The total number of Messages delivered to the
InPkts
SNMP entity from the transport service.
The total number of SNMP Messages which
OutPkts were passed from the SNMP protocol entity to
the transport service.
The total number of SNMP Messages which
InBadVersions were delivered to the SNMP protocol entity and
were for an unsupported SNMP version.
The total number of SNMP Messages delivered
InBadCommunityNames to the SNMP protocol entity which used a SNMP
community name not known to say entity.
The total number of SNMP Messages delivered
to the SNMP protocol entity which represented
InBadCommunityUses
an SNMP operation which was not allowed by
the SNMP community named in the Message.
The total number of ASN.1 or BER errors
InASNParseErrs encountered by the SNMP protocol entity when
decoding received SNMP Messages.

172
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM
The total number of SNMP PDUs which were
delivered to the SNMP protocol entity and for
InTooBigs
which the value of the error-status field is
'tooBig'.
The total number of SNMP PDUs which were
delivered to the SNMP protocol entity and for
InNoSuchNames
which the value of the error-status field is
'noSuchName'.
The total number of SNMP PDUs which were
delivered to the SNMP protocol entity and for
InBadValues
which the value of the error-status field is
'badValue'.
The total number valid SNMP PDUs which were
delivered to the SNMP protocol entity and for
which the value of the error-status field is
`readOnly'. It should be noted that it is a protocol
InReadOnlys
error to generate an SNMP PDU which contains
the value 'readOnly' in the error-status field, as
this object is provided as a means of detecting
incorrect implementations of the SNMP.
The total number of SNMP PDUs which were
delivered to the SNMP protocol entity and for
InGenErrs
which the value of the error-status field is
'genErr'.
The total number of MIB objects which have
been retrieved successfully by the SNMP
InTotalReqVars
protocol entity as the result of receiving valid
SNMP Get-Request and Get-Next PDUs.
The total number of MIB objects which have
been altered successfully by the SNMP protocol
InTotalSetVars
entity as the result of receiving valid SNMP
Set-Request PDUs.
The total number of SNMP Get-Request PDUs
InGetRequests which have been accepted and processed by
the SNMP protocol entity.
The total number of SNMP Get-Next PDUs
InGetNexts which have been accepted and processed by
the SNMP protocol entity.
The total number of SNMP Set-Request PDUs
InSetRequests which have been accepted and processed by
the SNMP protocol entity.
The total number of SNMP Get-Response PDUs
InGetResponses which have been accepted and processed by
the SNMP protocol entity.
The total number of SNMP Trap PDUs which
InTraps have been accepted and processed by the
SNMP protocol entity.
The total number of SNMP PDUs which were
generated by the SNMP protocol entity and for
OutTooBigs
which the value of the error-status field is
'tooBig'.
The total number of SNMP PDUs which were
generated by the SNMP protocol entity and for
OutNoSuchNames
which the value of the error-status is
'noSuchName'.
The total number of SNMP PDUs which were
generated by the SNMP protocol entity and for
OutBadValues
which the value of the error-status field is
'badValue'.
The total number of SNMP PDUs which were
generated by the SNMP protocol entity and for
OutGenErrs
which the value of the error-status field is
'genErr'.
The total number of SNMP Get-Request PDUs
OutGetRequests which have been generated by the SNMP
protocol entity.

173
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM
The total number of SNMP Get-Next PDUs
OutGetNexts which have been generated by the SNMP
protocol entity.
The total number of SNMP Set-Request PDUs
OutSetRequests which have been generated by the SNMP
protocol entity.
The total number of SNMP Get-Response PDUs
OutGetResponses which have been generated by the SNMP
protocol entity.
The total number of SNMP Trap PDUs which
OutTraps have been generated by the SNMP protocol
entity.
Indicates whether the SNMP agent process is
permitted to generate authentication-failure
traps. The value of this object overrides any
AuthenTraps
configuration information; as such, it provides a
means whereby all authentication-failure traps
may be disabled.
The total number of GetRequest-PDUs,
GetNextRequest-PDUs,
GetBulkRequest-PDUs, SetRe-quest-PDUs,
and InformRequest-PDUs delivered to the
SNMP entity which were silently dropped be-
SilentDrops cause the size of a reply containing an alternate
Re-sponse-PDU with an empty
variable-bindings field, was greater than, either
a local constraint, or the maximum message
size associated with the originator of the
request.
The total number of GetRequest-PDUs,
GetNex-tRequest-PDUs,
GetBulkRequest-PDUs, SetRequest-PDUs, and
InformRequest-PDUs delivered to the SNMP
ProxyDrops entity, which were silently dropped, because the
transmission of the (possibly translated)
message to a proxy target failed in a manner
(other than a time-out) such that no
Response-PDU could be returned.

Caution None.
References • SNMP commands.

5.5.63 SNMP Traphost Commands

get snmp traphost

Description: Use this command to get.
Command Syntax: get snmp traphost [ ip ip ] [port port]

create snmp traphost

Description: Use this command to create.
Command Syntax: create snmp traphost ip ip community community
[ port port ][ version v1 | v2c ]

delete snmp traphost

Description: Use this command to delete.

174
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM
Command Syntax: delete snmp traphost ip ip [port port]

modify snmp traphost

Description: Use this command to modify
Command Syntax: modify snmp traphost ip ip [port port] [ version v1 |
v2c ]

Parameter
Name Description
This specifies the Port at which the trap is to be
sent.
port port Type: Create --Optional Get Optional Modify –
Optional Delete -- Optional
Default value: 162
This specifies the Trap version to be sent to the
Manager.
version v1 | v2c Type: Create --Optional Get Optional
Modify -- Optional
Default value: v2c

Example $ create snmp traphost ip 172.25.34.34 community public

Output Verbose Mode On
Entry Created
Ip Address : 172.25.34.34
Community : public
Port : 162 Version : v2c
Verbose Mode Off:
Entry Created

Output field description

Field Description
This specifies the IP address of the manager where
Ip Address
trap is to be sent.
This specifies the Community name used in the
Community
trap.
This specifies the Port at which the trap is to be
Port
sent.
This specifies the Trap version to be sent to the
Version
Manager.

Caution None.
References • SNMP commands

5.5.64 File Commands

apply
Description: Use this command to apply a configuration file stored on the
system
Command Syntax: Apply fname file-name [version version]
[bestefforttrue|false]
Parameters
Name Description

175
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM
This specifies the name of the configuration file (the
extension of the file shall be .cfg) to be applied. The
file shall contain valid CLI commands. The user
shall specify the filename for files present in the
system as directories. The directories are
fname file-name
/nvram/cfg/ factorydef/, /nvram/user/, /sdram/cfg,
/sdram/user.
Type: mandatory
Valid values: string of up to 128 characters: (‘A’-’Z’,
‘a’-‘z’, ‘0’-‘9’, ’-‘,’_’)
This specifies the version of the file that needs to be
applied.
Type: Optional
version version
Default Value: Incase of multiple version files the
active copy gets applied. Not valid for single version
file.
If the besteffort flag is false, command execution
(as specified in "file-name"file) stops immediately
after a command returns an error. If the besteffort
flag is true, command execution (as specified in
besteffort true|false
"file-name"file) continues even if a command
returns an error.
Type : Optional
Default value : false

176
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM

download
Description: Use this command to download a binary, configuration or
user specific file from the remote host.
Command Syntax: download src src-filename dest dest-filename ip
ip-address [mode tftp|ftp]

Parameters
Name Description
This specifies the name of the binary, configuration or
user specific file to be downloaded from a remote
host.
The filename contains the complete path on the host.
The filename extension can be .cfg or .bin or any
src src-filename other user specified extension. A cfg file can contain
only valid CLI commands. A .bin file must bea valid
image file.
Type: Mandatory
Valid values: String of up to 128 characters ( all
characters except ‘;’, ‘ ‘, ‘?’)
This specifies the name of the binary, configuration or
user specific file on the system. The user shall specify
the filename for files present in the system, as
directories.
The directories are /nvram/bin/control/ - This
directory contains control plane zipped image. There
can be multiple versions of images. The name of the
image file shall be as specified in the configuration file
of createfi tool.
The files are stored in NVRAM.
/nvram/bin/dataplane/ - This directory contains data
plane zipped image. There can be multiple versions of
images. The name of the image file shall be as
specified in the configuration file of createfi tool. The
files are stored in NVRAM.
/nvram/bin/decompressor/ - This directory contains
decompressor image. There can be multiple versions
of images. The name of the image file shall be as
specified in the configuration file of createfi tool. The
files are stored in NVRAM.
dest dest-filename /nvram/bin/dslphy/ - This directory contains DSL
physical layer image. Only one version of image is
possible. The name of the image file shall be as
specified in the configuration file of createfi tool. The
files are stored in NVRAM.
/nvram/cfg/factorydef/ - This directory contains
factory default configuration files. There can be
multiple versions of files. The name of the file shall be
as specified in the configuration file of createfi tool.
The files are stored in NVRAM.
/nvram/user/ - This directory contains user specific
files. There can be multiple versions of files. The
files are stored in NVRAM.
/sdram/cfg/ - This directory contains user specific
Configuration files with .cfg extension. The files are
stored in SDRAM
/sdram/user/ - This directory contains user specific
files. The files are stored in SDRAM.
Type: Mandatory
Valid values: String of up to 128 characters ( all
Characters except ‘;’, ‘ ‘, ‘?’)
This specifies the IP address of the remote host from
ip ip-address which the file is to be downloaded.
Type: Mandatory

177
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM
Valid values: Any valid IP address.
This specifies the protocol to be used for downloading
the file. Currently only TFTP is supported.
mode tftp | ftp
Type: Optional
Default Value : TFTP

list
Description: This command is used to list the Configuration or binary
files stored on the unit
Command Syntax: list fname [/nvram | /sdram]

Parameters
Name Description
fname [/nvram | /sdram] This specifies whether the files of NVRAM or SDRAM are to
be listed.
/nvram – This lists all directories and files stored in NVRAM.
/sdram - This lists all directories and files stored in SDRAM.
Type: Optional.
Default Value : All the files present in the NVRAM or SDRAM
will be displayed.

178
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM

Output Fields
FIELD Description
The name of the file present in the directory. Name
Name
starting with ì/î indicates directory name.
Version This specifies the version of the file.
Time at which the file got created. This is displayed
Time
in Day Mon DD HH:MM:SS YEAR format.
Size The size of the file in bytes.
The access of the file. It can be read only, read
Access
write or write only.
The state of the file. It can be active, inactive, tried,
State
latest.

Caution None

References • upgrade command

• remove command

• apply command

• download command.

remove
Description: Use this command to remove a configuration or binary file
stored on the unit
Command Syntax: remove fname file-name [version version]

Parameters
Name Description
This specifies the file name, which needs to be
removed. The user shall specify the filename
for files present in the system, as directories.
The directories are /nvram/bin/control/,
fname file-name /nvram/bin/control/, /nvram/bin/dataplane/,
/nvram/bin/dslphy, /nvram/cfg/factorydef/,
/nvram/user/,/sdram/cfg, /sdram/user.
Type : Mandatory
Valid values: string of upto 128 characters

179
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM
('A'-'Z', 'a'-'z', '0'-'9', '-', '_')
This specifies the version of the file that need to be
version version removed.
Type: Optional for single version file. Mandatory
for multiple version file. Default Value:

upgrade
Description: Use this command to upgrade a configuration or binary file
stored on the system.
Command Syntax: upgrade fname file-name version version

Parameters
Name Description
fname file-name This specifies the file name, which needs to be up-
graded. The specified file becomes Active and the
present active file is made inactive.The user shall
specify the filename for files present in Columbia,
as directories. The directories are
/nvram/bin/control/, /nvram/bin/dataplane/,
/nvram/bin/decompressor, /nvram/bin/dslphy,
/nvram/cfg/factorydef/, /nvram/ user/, Type :
Mandatory Valid values: string of upto 128
characters (‘A’-’Z’, ‘a’-‘z’, ‘0’-‘9’, ’-‘, ’_’)
This specifies the version of the file that needs to be
version version upgraded
Type : Mandatory Valid values: Decimal number

5.5.65 Other Commands

alias
Description: Use this command to create an alias for any CLI
command. You can later call this command by using the
alias-string along with any additional parameters, which
you need to specify. It will display a list of all the aliases
currently defined if no parameter is given.
Command Syntax: alias [alias-string = aliased-command]

Parameters
Name Description
The string, which you will use to refer to the aliased
command, henceforth. It should not match any CLI
keyword.
alias-string
Type: Optional
Valid values: string of up to 14 characters (‘A’-’Z’,
‘a’-‘z’, ‘0’-‘9’, ’-‘, ’_’)
This is the total CLI command length (512
characters).
Type: Mandatory
aliased-command
Valid values: Any string (all printable characters
except ‘;’) as long as the total CLI Command length
is not exceeded.

Mode Super-User, User

180
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM
Output With Parameters

Output Fields
FIELD Description
Alias This is the new abbreviated command, which you
may use in place of the string specified in
Command.
Command The command string which has been aliased.

unalias
Description: Use this command to delete an alias. Either a particular
alias or all aliases can be removed using this command.
Command Syntax: unalias [all | <name>]

Parameters
Name Description
Using this option all the aliases defined in the
system will be removed.
all
Type: Optional
Valid values: String ìALL.î
Name of the alias defined for a command.
Name Type: Optional.
Valid values: Any valid alias defined in the system.

help
Description: Use this command for a listing of all the user inputs
permissible at the point. In case Help is asked for, as a
parameter of any incomplete command, then it displays a
list of all the pending/Extra parameters input by the user. In
all other cases, the next set of permissible keywords
required in order to shortlist a command, is displayed. The
Incomplete Command keyed in by the user is made
available again, after help is dispalyed.
Command Syntax: help | ?

logout
Description: Use this command to exit from the CLI shell.
Command Syntax: logout | quit | exit

prompt
Description: Use this command to set the new CLI prompt.
Command Syntax: prompt new-prompt

Parameters

181
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM
Name Description
The new prompt string.
prompt Type: Mandatory
new-prompt Valid values: String of up to 19 characters ( All
characters except ‘;’, ‘ ‘, ‘?’)

traceroute
Description: This command is used to trace the route to the specified
destination.
Command Syntax: traceroute {ip-address | dname domain-name} {ping | udp}
[ -m num-of-hops] [-w wait-time] [-p udp-port-number] [-q
numof-probes]

Parameters
Name Description
This specifies the Destination address to be pinged.
Type: Mandatory
ip-address | dname
Valid values : Any Valid IP Address (0.0.0.0 –
domain-name
255.255.255.255) or Domain Name (String of Max
63 characters (‘a’-‘z’, ’A’- ‘Z’, ’0’-‘9’, ’-‘, ’_’and ‘.‘)
Traceroute probe message type
Ping | udp
Type: Mandatory
Maximum number of hops to search for ip-address
-m num-of-hops Type: Optional Valid Values: 0-255
Default Value : 30
This specifies the timeout in seconds
Type: Optional
-w wait-time
Valid values : 0-65535
Default Value : 5
Destination UDP port to be used, only when Probe
is Udp
-p udp-port-number Type: Optional.
Valid Values: 0-65535
Default Value : 32768
Number of probes to be sent for each TTL value
Type: Optional
-q num-of-probes
Valid Values: 0-255
Default Value : 3

Example $ traceroute 192.168.1.13 ping

Output Tracing route to [192.168.1.13]
Over a maximum of 30 hops
1 0.000000 ms 0.000000 ms 0.000000 ms 192.168.1.13
Trace complete.

Output Fields
FIELD Description
1 This denotes the hop counter value.
These are the Round trip timings of the 3 probe
2-4 packets sent. A * denotes that this probe was
missed.
This is the ip address of the
5
intermediate/destination node.

Caution None.
References • ping command.

182
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM

verbose
Description: Using this command, a user can view the status of
entries before and after the execution of a command
(create, delete, modify,get). However if this mode is
turned off, then display only shows the final result of
execution of command, i.e. whether it was successful or
failure.
Command Syntax: Verbose [on | off ]

Parameters
Name Description
Used for switching on the verbose mode.
On Type: Optional
Valid values: On.
Used for switching off the verbose mode.
Off Type: Optional.
Valid values: Off

183
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM

6 Examples of Frequently Used CLI

Previouse chapter detailed whole CLI commands that users can use. For
the 1st time CLI users, this chapter lists most frequently used CLI examples
to reduce the barrier to learning,

6.1 IPAM-4800/4824 Default Settings

At the very first time of your login IPAM-4800/4824, the default settings as
follows:

Default IP :192.168.100.111

SNTP : disable

RFC-1483 Bridge mode only

One PVC(8/81) for each ADSL port

Bridge port numbering 1 to 48 mapping to PVC 8/81 for ADSL port1 to port
48/24

VLAN feature Disable

Eth0 enable (for uplink), its bridge port number is 385

Eth1 disable (for downlink)

MGMT interface disable

6.2 Modify the system IP

Unless you aggregate both Eth0 & Eth1 for uplink, each Ethernet interface
has an independent IP. According to the default setting, only Eth0 was
enabled, and 192.168.100.111 is assigned as default IP.

Following steps describe how to modify Eth0’s system IP.

Step 1: Get current Ethernet interface setting

$get ethernet intf ifname eth-0

Interface : eth-0
Type : Uplink UseDhcp : False

184
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM
IP Address : 192.168.100.111 Mask : 255.255.255.0
Pkt Type : ALL
Orl(mbps) : 100
Configured Duplex : Auto Duplex : Full
Configured Speed : Auto
Class0thrshld : 100 Class1thrshld: 100
Class2thrshld : 100 Class3thrshld: 100
Class4thrshld : 100 Class5thrshld: 100
Class6thrshld : 100 Class7thrshld: 100
ProfileName : SPPROFILE
Mgmt VLAN Index :-
Tagged Mgmt PDU Prio : 0
Speed : 100BT
Operational Status : Up Admin Status : Up
Step 2: Disable the Ethernet interface; you have to disable the Ethernet
interface before you want to change the IP address

$modify ethernet intf ifname eth-0 disable

Interface : eth-0
Type : Uplink UseDhcp : False
IP Address : 192.168.100.111 Mask : 255.255.255.0
Pkt Type : ALL
Orl(mbps) : 100
Configured Duplex : Auto Duplex : Full
Configured Speed : Auto
Class0thrshld : 100 Class1thrshld : 100
Class2thrshld : 100 Class3thrshld : 100
Class4thrshld : 100 Class5thrshld : 100
Class6thrshld : 100 Class7thrshld : 100
ProfileName : SPPROFILE
Mgmt VLAN Index :-
Tagged Mgmt PDU Prio: 0
Speed : 100BT
Operational Status : Up Admin Status : Up

Set Done

Thu Jan 01 00:03:13 1970 : MAJOR ALARM : ETHER Interface Down : Interface
- eth-
0

Interface : eth-0
Type : Uplink UseDhcp : False
IP Address : 192.168.100.111 Mask : 255.255.255.0
Pkt Type : ALL
Orl(mbps) : 100
Configured Duplex : Auto Duplex : Full
Configured Speed : Auto
Class0thrshld : 100 Class1thrshld : 100
Class2thrshld : 100 Class3thrshld : 100
Class4thrshld : 100 Class5thrshld : 100
Class6thrshld : 100 Class7thrshld : 100
ProfileName : SPPROFILE
Mgmt VLAN Index :-
Tagged Mgmt PDU Prio: 0
Speed :-
Operational Status : Down Admin Status : Down

185
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM
Step 3: Modify the IP address

$modify ethernet intf ifname eth-0 ip 192.15768.100.112 mask 12255.255.255.0

enable

Interface : eth-0
Type : Uplink UseDhcp : False
IP Address : 192.168.100.111 Mask : 255.255.255.0
Pkt Type : ALL
Orl(mbps) : 100
Configured Duplex : Auto Duplex : Full
Configured Speed : Auto
Class0thrshld : 100 Class1thrshld : 100
Class2thrshld : 100 Class3thrshld : 100
Class4thrshld : 100 Class5thrshld : 100
Class6thrshld : 100 Class7thrshld : 100
ProfileName : SPPROFILE
Mgmt VLAN Index :-
Tagged Mgmt PDU Prio: 0
Speed :-
Operational Status : Down Admin Status : Down

Set Done

Thu Jan 01 00:03:42 1970 : STATUS ALARM : ETHER Interface Up : Interface -

eth-0

Interface : eth-0
Type : Uplink UseDhcp : False
IP Address : 192.168.100.112 Mask : 255.255.255.0
Pkt Type : ALL
Orl(mbps) : 100
Configured Duplex : Auto Duplex : Full
Configured Speed : Auto
Class0thrshld : 100 Class1thrshld : 100
Class2thrshld : 100 Class3thrshld : 100
Class4thrshld : 100 Class5thrshld : 100
Class6thrshld : 100 Class7thrshld : 100
ProfileName : SPPROFILE
Mgmt VLAN Index :-
Tagged Mgmt PDU Prio: 0
Speed : 100BT
Operational Status : Up Admin Status : Up

6.3 Set System Time

IPAM-4800/4824 supports SNTP and RTC (Real-Time Clock) is not built in.
Users need to set the SNTP server related information so that
IPAM-4800/4824 will get the system time via SNTPserver. Alternatively,
use CLI command to set the system time directly, but the system time will
lost when the system is powered off.

How to set system time desribes as follows:

Set the SNTP server

186
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM
Step 1: Create a SNTP server

Step 2: Enable SNTP

$create sntp ?
Command Description
------- -----------
servaddr SNTP Server address
$create sntp servaddr 192.168.100.253

Entry Created

Server Addr : 192.168.100.253 Status : active

$modify sntp cfg enable

Status : Disable

Set Done

Status : Enable
$
$get sntp stats

Requests count :1 Response count :1

Invalid Response count : 0 Lost Response count : 0
Last Time Stamp [MM/DD/YYYY::HH:MM:SS] : Thu Apr 29 10:24:36 2004
//get time from sntp server

Option 2: Set system time directly

$get system info

Description :
Name :
Location :
Contact :
Vendor :
LogThreshold :0
Object-id : 1.3.6.1.4.1.3278.1.12
Up Time(HH:MM:SS) : 0:4:46
HwVersion : ADSL-1.0
CPLDVersion : 1.4
CPSwVersion : COL2.6.1.0.040412
CPSwVersion(Build) : 1.00.040407-ADSL
DPSwVersion : DP_B02_06_22_05
System Time : Thu Jan 01 00:04:46 1970
Time Zone : GMT
DST : off
Services : physical datalink internet end-to-end end-to-end end-to-end
applications
$

$modify system info ? // format for setting

Parameter Description
--------- -----------

187
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM
[ contact "<name>" ] Identification of the contact person
[ name "<name>" ] Name of the system
[ location "<name>" ] The physical location of this node
[ vendor "<name>" ] Vendor-specific information
[ logthresh <decvalue> ] The severity level of trap
[ systime "<sys-time>" ] SysTime in format mon dd hh:mm:ss year
[ dst <on | off> ] Daylight Saving Time
[ timezone "<timezone>" ] Time Zone
_______________________________________________________________________
______
Valid System Time Zone :
IDLW|NT|HST|CAT|AHST|YST|PST|MST|CST|EST|AST|NFST|

NFT|BRST|AT|WAT|GMT|UTC|WET|CET|FWT|MET|MEWT|SWT|

EET|IST|BT|IT|ZP4|ZP5|INST|ZP6|NST|WAST|SSMT|JT|

CCT|ROK|KST|JST|CAST|EAST|GST|IDLE|NZST|NZT

$modify system info systime " May 10 17:00 2004"

Description :
Name :
Location :
Contact :
Vendor :
LogThreshold :0
Object-id : 1.3.6.1.4.1.3278.1.12
Up Time(HH:MM:SS) : 0:12:55
HwVersion : ADSL-1.0
CPLDVersion : 1.4
CPSwVersion : COL2.6.1.0.040412
CPSwVersion(Build) : 1.00.040407-ADSL
DPSwVersion : DP_B02_06_22_05
System Time : Thu Jan 01 00:12:55 1970
Time Zone : GMT
DST : off
Services : physical datalink internet end-to-end end-to-end end-to-end
applications

Set Done

Description :
Name :
Location :
Contact :
Vendor :
LogThreshold :0
Object-id : 1.3.6.1.4.1.3278.1.12
Up Time(HH:MM:SS) : 0:12:55

188
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM
HwVersion : ADSL-1.0
CPLDVersion : 1.4
CPSwVersion : COL2.6.1.0.040412
CPSwVersion(Build): 1.00.040407-ADSL
DPSwVersion : DP_B02_06_22_05
System Time : Mon May 10 10:17:00 2004
Time Zone : GMT
DST : off
Services : physical datalink internet end-to-end end-to-end end-to-end
applications
$$modify system info systime " May 10 10:17:00 2004" timea
Mon May 10 10:17:14 2004 : MAJOR ALARM : ADSL ATUC Down : Interface -
dsl-12
$modify system info systime " May 10 10:17:00 2004" timezone "CCT"

Description :
Name :
Location :
Contact :
Vendor :
LogThreshold :0
Object-id : 1.3.6.1.4.1.3278.1.12
Up Time(HH:MM:SS) : 0:13:18
HwVersion : ADSL-1.0
CPLDVersion : 1.4
CPSwVersion : COL2.6.1.0.040412
CPSwVersion(Build): 1.00.040407-ADSL
DPSwVersion : DP_B02_06_22_05
System Time : Mon May 10 10:17:23 2004
Time Zone : GMT
DST : off
Services : physical datalink internet end-to-end end-to-end end-to-end
applications

Set Done

Description :
Name :
Location :
Contact :
Vendor :
LogThreshold :0
Object-id : 1.3.6.1.4.1.3278.1.12
Up Time(HH:MM:SS) : 0:13:18
HwVersion : ADSL-1.0
CPLDVersion : 1.4
CPSwVersion : COL2.6.1.0.040412
CPSwVersion(Build) : 1.00.040407-ADSL
DPSwVersion : DP_B02_06_22_05
System Time : Mon May 10 10:17:00 2004
Time Zone : CCT
DST : off

189
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM
Services : physical datalink internet end-to-end end-to-end end-to-end
applications

6.4 VLAN
IPAM-4800/4824 supports port-based VLAN, and Group VLAN. This
section shows how to create two VLAN groups (VLAN ID = 2, and 3), PVC
8/81 of both ADSL port 1 & 2 will join in VLAN group 2, and create a new
PVC(8/82) for ADSL1, and assign this PVC to VLAN group 3.

Besides, uplink interface ETH-0 will join VLAN group 2 & 3 as trunk
interface.

Step 1 : Create a VLAN group No.2, and assign to Bridge port 1(ADSL port
1 PVC 8/81), and 385(Eth-0)

$create vlan static vlanname vlan2 vlanid 2 egressports 1 385

upuntaggedports 1
// create a static vlan 1 then assign port 1 (portid-1) and port 385 (eth-0) as membership

Entry Created

VLAN Name : vlan2

VLAN Index :2
Egress ports :1 385
Forbidden Egress Ports : None
Untagged Ports :1
Bridging Mode : Residential
Flood support Status : enable
Broadcast support Status : enable
$
$

Step 2 : Set Bridge port 1(ADSL port 1 PVC 8/81) as PVID 2

$modify gvrp port info portid 1 portvlanid 2 acceptframetypes all

ingressfilteri ng true
// set the PVID 2 to portid 1

Port Id :1
Port VLAN Index :1 Accept Frame Types: All
Ingress Filtering : False Gvrp Status : Disable
Failed Registrations :0 Last Pdu Origin :
00:00:00:00:00:00
Restricted Vlan Registration : False

Set Done

190
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM
Port Id :1
Port VLAN Index :2 Accept Frame Types: All
Ingress Filtering : True Gvrp Status : Disable
Failed Registrations :0 Last Pdu Origin :
00:00:00:00:00:00
Restricted Vlan Registration : False
$

$
$
$get vlan curr onfinfo // Show current VLAN status

VLAN Index :1
VLAN Status : Other
Egress ports :1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
9 10 11 12 13
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
25 26 27 28 29 30
31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 4
7 48 385
Untagged Ports :1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
9 10 11 12 13
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
25 26 27 28 29 30
31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 4
7 48 385
Bridging Mode : Residential
Flood support Status : enable
Broadcast support Status : enable

VLAN Index :2
VLAN Status : permanent
Egress ports :1 385
Untagged Ports :1
Bridging Mode : Residential
Flood support Status : enable
Broadcast support Status : enable

VLAN Index :3
VLAN Status : permanent
Egress ports :2 385
Untagged Ports :2
Bridging Mode : Residential
Flood support Status : enable
Broadcast support Status : enable

Step 3 : Create a new PVC(8/82) in ADSL port 1

// Create the second PVC on the DSL port

// Step 1 : Create atm vc and aal5 interface
// Step 2 : Create eoa interface

191
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM
// Step 3 : Create bridge interface

$create atm vc intf ifname aal5-48 lowif atm-0 vpi 8 vci 82 // Step 1

Entry Created

VC IfName : aal5-48 Low IfName : atm-0

VPI :8 VCI : 82
Admin Status : Up Oper Status : Up
Aal5 Tx Size : 1536 Aal5 Rx Size : 1536
AAL Type : AAL5 AAL5 Encap : LLC Mux
Channel : Interleaved Last Change (sec) :0
MgmtMode : Data Row Status : active
VC Type : PVC VC Topology : Point to Point
$
$
$create eoa intf ifname eoa-48 lowif aal5-48 // Step 2

Entry Created

IfName : eoa-48 LowIfName : aal5-48

FCS : False
Pkt Type : ALL
Oper Status : Up Admin Status : Up
$

Step 4: Create a new bridge port 49, and maps to new created PVC 8/82 in
ADSL port 1

$create bridge port intf ifname eoa-48 portid 49 learning enable status
enable // Step 3

Entry Created

Port Id : 49 IfName : eoa-48

Max Unicast Addresses : 16 Learning Status : Enable
Port Oper Status : Enable Port Admin Status: Enable
Sticky Status : Disable FDB Modify : Enable
Acl Global Deny Apply : Enable
Acl Global Track Apply: Enable

Step 5: Create a new VLAN group No.3, and assign to Bridge port
49(ADSL port 1 PVC 8/82), and 385(Eth-0)

// Set the second PVC to mapping to a vlan

$create vlan static vlanname vlan3 vlanid 3 egressports 49 385

untaggedports 49

192
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM
Entry Created

VLAN Name : vlan3

VLAN Index :3
Egress ports : 49 385
Forbidden Egress Ports : None
Untagged Ports : 49
Bridging Mode : Residential
Flood support Status : enable
Broadcast support Status : enable

Step 6 : Set Bridge port 49(ADSL port 1 PVC 8/82) as PVID 3

//Set the PVID 3 to portid 49

$modify gvrp port info portid 49 portvlanid 3 acceptframetypes all
ingressfilter ing true

Port Id : 49
Port VLAN Index :1 Accept Frame Types: All
Ingress Filtering : False Gvrp Status : Disable
Failed Registrations :0 Last Pdu Origin : 00:00:00:00:00:00
Restricted Vlan Registration: False

Set Done

Port Id : 49
Port VLAN Index :3 Accept Frame Types: All
Ingress Filtering : True Gvrp Status : Disable
Failed Registrations :0 Last Pdu Origin : 00:00:00:00:00:00
Restricted Vlan Registration: False

Step 7 : Modify the VLAN group 2, and add Bridge port 2(ADSL port 2 PVC
8/81)

$modify vlan static vlanname vlan2 egressports 1 2 385 untaggedports 1

2
//Add port2 to vlan2 use vlanname index

VLAN Name : vlan2

VLAN Index :2
Egress ports :1 385
Forbidden Egress Ports : None
Untagged Ports :1
Bridging Mode : Residential
Flood support Status : enable
Broadcast support Status : enable

Set Done

VLAN Name : vlan2

VLAN Index :2

193
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM
Egress ports :1 2 385
Forbidden Egress Ports : None
Untagged Ports :1 2
Bridging Mode : Residential
Flood support Status : enable
Broadcast support Status : enable

$modify vlan static vlanid 2 egressports 1 2 3 385 untaggedports 1 2 3

//Add port3 to vlan2 use vlanid index
VLAN Name : vlan2
VLAN Index :2
Egress ports :1 2 385
Forbidden Egress Ports : None
Untagged Ports :1 2
Bridging Mode : Residential
Flood support Status : enable
Broadcast support Status : enable

Set Done

VLAN Name : vlan2

VLAN Index :2
Egress ports :1 2 3 385
Forbidden Egress Ports : None
Untagged Ports :1 2 3
Bridging Mode : Residential
Flood support Status : enable
Broadcast support Status : enable

Step 8 : Modify the VLAN from 8/81 to 0/35

The AAL5 start number is 0

$modify atm vc intf ifname aal5-1 disable

VC IfName : aal5-1 Low IfName : atm-1

VPI :8 VCI : 81
Admin Status : Up Oper Status : Down
Aal5 Tx Size : 1536 Aal5 Rx Size : 1536
AAL Type : AAL5 AAL5 Encap : LLC Mux
Channel : Interleaved Last Change (sec) :0
MgmtMode : Data Row Status : active
VC Type : PVC VC Topology : Point to Point

Set Done

VC IfName : aal5-1 Low IfName : atm-1

VPI :8 VCI : 81
Admin Status : Down Oper Status : Down

194
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM
Aal5 Tx Size : 1536 Aal5 Rx Size : 1536
AAL Type : AAL5 AAL5 Encap : LLC Mux
Channel : Interleaved Last Change (sec) :0
MgmtMode : Data Row Status : active
VC Type : PVC VC Topology : Point to Point

$modify atm vc intf ifname aal5-1 vpi 0 vci 35

(Set VPI / VCI is 0 / 35)

VC IfName : aal5-1 Low IfName : atm-1

VPI :8 VCI : 81
Admin Status : Down Oper Status : Down
Aal5 Tx Size : 1536 Aal5 Rx Size : 1536
AAL Type : AAL5 AAL5 Encap : LLC Mux
Channel : Interleaved Last Change (sec) :0
MgmtMode : Data Row Status : active
VC Type : PVC VC Topology : Point to Point

Set Done

VC IfName : aal5-1 Low IfName : atm-1

VPI :0 VCI : 35
Admin Status : Down Oper Status : Down
Aal5 Tx Size : 1536 Aal5 Rx Size : 1536
AAL Type : AAL5 AAL5 Encap : LLC Mux
Channel : Interleaved Last Change (sec) :0
MgmtMode : Data Row Status : active
VC Type : PVC VC Topology : Point to Point

$modify atm vc intf ifname aal5-1 enable

VC IfName : aal5-1 Low IfName : atm-1

VPI :0 VCI : 35
Admin Status : Down Oper Status : Down
Aal5 Tx Size : 1536 Aal5 Rx Size : 1536
AAL Type : AAL5 AAL5 Encap : LLC Mux
Channel : Interleaved Last Change (sec) :0
MgmtMode : Data Row Status : active
VC Type : PVC VC Topology : Point to Point

Set Done

VC IfName : aal5-1 Low IfName : atm-1

VPI :0 VCI : 35
Admin Status : Up Oper Status : Down
Aal5 Tx Size : 1536 Aal5 Rx Size : 1536

195
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM
AAL Type : AAL5 AAL5 Encap : LLC Mux
Channel : Interleaved Last Change (sec) :0
MgmtMode : Data Row Status : active
VC Type : PVC VC Topology : Point to Point

6.5 Enable the Stacking

This procedure needs two units of IPAM-4800/4824,

- Enables the downlink port(Eth-1) of the first unit, and then create the
bridge port 386 for the Eth-1

- The second unit is the default configuration, and set the IP & system IP
as previous description.

- Connect the downlink of the first unit to the uplink of the second unit.

Note: the stacking can support data channel only. The management
capability for stacking is till not available,

// Create the second ethernet interface for stacking

// Step 1 : Create eth-1 to downlink
// Step 2 : Create bridge port to eth-1

$create ethernet intf ifname eth-1 type downlink enable // Step 1

Entry Created

Interface : eth-1
Type : Downlink UseDhcp : False
IP Address : 0.0.0.0 Mask : 0.0.0.0
Pkt Type : ALL
Orl(mbps) : 100
Configured Duplex : Auto Duplex : None
Configured Speed : Auto
Class0thrshld : 100 Class1thrshld : 100
Class2thrshld : 100 Class3thrshld : 100
Class4thrshld : 100 Class5thrshld : 100
Class6thrshld : 100 Class7thrshld : 100
ProfileName : SPPROFILE
Mgmt VLAN Index :-
Tagged Mgmt PDU Prio: -
Speed :-
Operational Status : Down Admin Status : Up
$
$

$create bridge port intf portid 386 ifname eth-1 learning enable status
enable // Step 2

196
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM

Entry Created

Port Id : 386 IfName : eth-1

Max Unicast Addresses : 256 Learning Status : Enable
Port Oper Status : Disable Port Admin Status : Enable
Sticky Status : Disable FDB Modify : Enable
Acl Global Deny Apply : Enable
Acl Global Track Apply: Enable
$
$

6.6 Modify the Downstram/ Upstream Rate

The DSL port number is 0 to 47

$modify adsl line intf disable ifname dsl-11

(Set ADSL port 12 disable)

IfName : dsl-11
Line Type : interleavedOnly Coding Type : dmt
GsUtopia L2TxAddr : 26 GsUtopia L2RxAddr : 26
Gs Clock Type : oscillator Gs Action : startup
Admin Status : Up Oper Status : Up
Trans Atuc Cap : ansit1413 q9921PotsNonOverlapped
q9921PotsOverlapped q9921IsdnNonOverlapped
q9921isdnOverlapped
q9922potsOverlapped
q9922Adsl2PlusPotsNonOverlappedq9922Ads
l2PlusPotsOverlapped q9922Adsl2PotsNonOverlapped
Trans Atuc Actual : q9922Adsl2PlusPotsNonOverlapped
GsDmtTrellis : trellisOn
Trans Atur Cap :
q9922Adsl2PlusPotsNonOverlappedq9922Adsl2PlusPotsOverlappe
d q9922Adsl2PotsNonOverlapped
PM Conf PMSF : idleop
Line DELT Conf LDSF : inhibit

Set Done

Thu Jan 01 07:19:36 1970 : MAJOR ALARM : ADSL ATUC Down : Interface - dsl-11

IfName : dsl-11
Line Type : interleavedOnly Coding Type : dmt
GsUtopia L2TxAddr : 26 GsUtopia L2RxAddr : 26
Gs Clock Type : oscillator Gs Action : startup
Admin Status : Down Oper Status : Down
Trans Atuc Cap : ansit1413 q9921PotsNonOverlapped
q9921PotsOverlapped q9921IsdnNonOverlapped

197
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM
q9921isdnOverlapped
q9922potsOverlapped
q9922Adsl2PlusPotsNonOverlappedq9922Ads
l2PlusPotsOverlapped q9922Adsl2PotsNonOverlapped
Trans Atuc Actual :-
GsDmtTrellis : trellisOn
Trans Atur Cap :-
PM Conf PMSF : idleop
Line DELT Conf LDSF : inhibit

$modify adsl line profile atucintlmaxtxrate 0x7d000 ifname dsl-11

(Set ADSL port 12 interleave mode Downstream 512K)
(The value is hex so you must conversion to decimal )
IfName : dsl-11

ADSL ATUC Configuration :

---------------------------
Rate Adaptation : adaptAtStartup
Target Snr Margin(dB/10) : 60 Max Snr Margin(dB/10) : 310
GsRsIntCorrectionUp : 125us Dnshift SnrMargin(dB/10): 0
Upshift SnrMargin(dB/10) : 120 Min Upshift Time(sec) : 0
Min Dnshift Time(sec) : 0 Fast Min Tx Rate(bps) : 0x7d00
Intl Min Tx Rate(bps) : 0x7d00 Fast Max Tx Rate(bps) :
0x1f38300
Intl Max Tx Rate(bps) : 0x1f38300 Max Intl Delay(ms) :0
GsTxStartBin : 0x20 GsTxEndBin :
0x1ff
GsRxStartBin : 0x6 GsRxEndBin :
0x1f
GsMaxBitsPerBin : 15 GsMaxDCo :
256
GsRxBinAdjust : Disable GsEraseProfiles :
Disable
GsAdi2x : standard GsStandard :
adsl2Plus
GsInitiate :- GsTxPowerAtten :-
GsCodingGain : Auto GsRsFastOvrhdDown :1
GsRsIntCorrectionDown : 1Ms GsRsFastOvrhdUp :1
GsDrStby : Disable GsExpandedExchange :
Expanded
GsEscapeFastRetrain : Disable GsFastRetrain :
Disable
GsBitSwap : Enable GsNtr :
LocalOcs
GsAnnexType : adsl2 GsAlctlUsVer :
Unknown
GsUseCustomBin : Disable GsFullRetrain :
Enable
GsPsdMaskType :- DmtConfMode :
fdmMode
GsExtRsMemory : notpresent ParamHybridLossTestStart : 0x2

198
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM
GsParamHybridLossTestEnd : 0x40 GsDmtTrellis : on
GsAdvertisedCapabilities : AnnexA
GslTriggerMode : Disable
Type : interleavedOnly
GsDnBinUsage :
0xFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
FFFFFFFFFFFF
ParametricTestInputFile :-
Data Boost : Enable Upstream PSD :
Standard
Conf PM Mode : pmstatel3enable pmstatel2enable
Conf PML0 Time(sec) : 180
Conf PML2 Time(sec) : 180 Conf PML2 ATPR (dB/10) : 30
Conf PML2 Rate(bps) : 0x10000
Conf GsREADSL2 Enable : disable

ADSL ATUR Configuration :

---------------------------
Target Snr Margin(dB/10): 60 Dnshift SnrMargin(dB/10): 0
Upshift SnrMargin(dB/10): 120 Min Upshift Time(sec) :0
Min Dnshift Time(sec) : 0 Fast Min Tx Rate(bps) : 0x7d00
Intl Min Tx Rate(bps) : 0x7d00 Fast Max Tx Rate(bps) : 0x109a00
Intl Max Tx Rate(bps) : 0x109a00 Max Intl Delay(ms) : 16
_______________________________________________________________________
______

Set Done

IfName : dsl-11

ADSL ATUC Configuration :

---------------------------
Rate Adaptation : adaptAtStartup
Target Snr Margin(dB/10): 60 Max Snr Margin(dB/10) : 310
GsRsIntCorrectionUp : 125us Dnshift SnrMargin(dB/10) : 0
Upshift SnrMargin(dB/10): 120 Min Upshift Time(sec) : 0
Min Dnshift Time(sec) : 0 Fast Min Tx Rate(bps) : 0x7d00
Intl Min Tx Rate(bps) : 0x7d00 Fast Max Tx Rate(bps) :
0x1f38300
Intl Max Tx Rate(bps) : 0x7d000 Max Intl Delay(ms) :0
GsTxStartBin : 0x20 GsTxEndBin :
0x1ff
GsRxStartBin : 0x6 GsRxEndBin :
0x1f
GsMaxBitsPerBin : 15 GsMaxDCo :
256
GsRxBinAdjust : Disable GsEraseProfiles : Disable
GsAdi2x : standard GsStandard :
adsl2Plus
GsInitiate :- GsTxPowerAtten :-
GsCodingGain : Auto GsRsFastOvrhdDown :1

199
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM
GsRsIntCorrectionDown : 1Ms GsRsFastOvrhdUp :1
GsDrStby : Disable GsExpandedExchange :
Expanded
GsEscapeFastRetrain : Disable GsFastRetrain :
Disable
GsBitSwap : Enable GsNtr :
LocalOcs
GsAnnexType : adsl2 GsAlctlUsVer :
Unknown
GsUseCustomBin : Disable GsFullRetrain : Enable
GsPsdMaskType :- DmtConfMode :
fdmMode
GsExtRsMemory : notpresent ParamHybridLossTestStart : 0x2
GsParamHybridLossTestEnd : 0x40 GsDmtTrellis : on
GsAdvertisedCapabilities : AnnexA
GslTriggerMode : Disable
Type : interleavedOnly
GsDnBinUsage :
0xFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
FFFFFFFFFFFF
ParametricTestInputFile : -
Data Boost : Enable Upstream PSD :
Standard
Conf PM Mode : pmstatel3enable pmstatel2enable
Conf PML0 Time(sec) : 180
Conf PML2 Time(sec) : 180 Conf PML2 ATPR (dB/10) : 30
Conf PML2 Rate(bps) : 0x10000
Conf GsREADSL2 Enable : disable

ADSL ATUR Configuration :

---------------------------
Target Snr Margin(dB/10) : 60 Dnshift SnrMargin(dB/10) : 0
Upshift SnrMargin(dB/10) : 120 Min Upshift Time(sec) : 0
Min Dnshift Time(sec) : 0 Fast Min Tx Rate(bps) : 0x7d00
Intl Min Tx Rate(bps) : 0x7d00 Fast Max Tx Rate(bps) : 0x109a00
Intl Max Tx Rate(bps) : 0x109a00 Max Intl Delay(ms) : 16

$modify adsl line profile aturintlmaxtxrate 0x7d000 ifname dsl-11

(Set ADSL port 12 interleave mode upstream 512K)

(The value is hex so you must conversion to decimal )

IfName : dsl-11

ADSL ATUC Configuration :

---------------------------
Rate Adaptation : adaptAtStartup
Target Snr Margin(dB/10) : 60 Max Snr Margin(dB/10) : 310
GsRsIntCorrectionUp : 125us Dnshift SnrMargin(dB/10) : 0

200
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM
Upshift SnrMargin(dB/10) : 120 Min Upshift Time(sec) : 0
Min Dnshift Time(sec) :0 Fast Min Tx Rate(bps) : 0x7d00
Intl Min Tx Rate(bps) : 0x7d00 Fast Max Tx Rate(bps) :
0x1f38300
Intl Max Tx Rate(bps) : 0x1f38300 Max Intl Delay(ms) :0
GsTxStartBin : 0x20 GsTxEndBin :
0x1ff
GsRxStartBin : 0x6 GsRxEndBin :
0x1f
GsMaxBitsPerBin : 15 GsMaxDCo :
256
GsRxBinAdjust : Disable GsEraseProfiles :
Disable
GsAdi2x : standard GsStandard :
adsl2Plus
GsInitiate :- GsTxPowerAtten :-
GsCodingGain : Auto GsRsFastOvrhdDown :1
GsRsIntCorrectionDown : 1Ms GsRsFastOvrhdUp :1
GsDrStby : Disable GsExpandedExchange :
Expanded
GsEscapeFastRetrain : Disable GsFastRetrain :
Disable
GsBitSwap : Enable GsNtr :
LocalOcs
GsAnnexType : adsl2 GsAlctlUsVer :
Unknown
GsUseCustomBin : Disable GsFullRetrain :
Enable
GsPsdMaskType :- DmtConfMode :
fdmMode
GsExtRsMemory : notpresent ParamHybridLossTestStart : 0x2
GsParamHybridLossTestEnd : 0x40 GsDmtTrellis : on
GsAdvertisedCapabilities : AnnexA
GslTriggerMode : Disable
Type : interleavedOnly
GsDnBinUsage :
0xFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
FFFFFFFFFFFF
ParametricTestInputFile : -
Data Boost : Enable Upstream PSD :
Standard
Conf PM Mode : pmstatel3enable pmstatel2enable
Conf PML0 Time(sec) : 180
Conf PML2 Time(sec) : 180 Conf PML2 ATPR (dB/10) : 30
Conf PML2 Rate(bps) : 0x10000
Conf GsREADSL2 Enable : disable

ADSL ATUR Configuration :

---------------------------
Target Snr Margin(dB/10): 60 Dnshift SnrMargin(dB/10): 0
Upshift SnrMargin(dB/10): 120 Min Upshift Time(sec) :0
Min Dnshift Time(sec) : 0 Fast Min Tx Rate(bps) : 0x7d00

201
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM
Intl Min Tx Rate(bps) : 0x7d00 Fast Max Tx Rate(bps) : 0x109a00
Intl Max Tx Rate(bps) : 0x109a00 Max Intl Delay(ms) : 16
______________________________________________________________________

Set Done

IfName : dsl-11

ADSL ATUC Configuration :

---------------------------
Rate Adaptation : adaptAtStartup
Target Snr Margin(dB/10): 60 Max Snr Margin(dB/10) : 310
GsRsIntCorrectionUp : 125us Dnshift SnrMargin(dB/10): 0
Upshift SnrMargin(dB/10): 120 Min Upshift Time(sec) :0
Min Dnshift Time(sec) : 0 Fast Min Tx Rate(bps) : 0x7d00
Intl Min Tx Rate(bps) : 0x7d00 Fast Max Tx Rate(bps) : 0x1f38300
Intl Max Tx Rate(bps) : 0x1f38300 Max Intl Delay(ms) :0
GsTxStartBin : 0x20 GsTxEndBin :
0x1ff
GsRxStartBin : 0x6 GsRxEndBin :
0x1f
GsMaxBitsPerBin : 15 GsMaxDCo :
256
GsRxBinAdjust : Disable GsEraseProfiles : Disable
GsAdi2x : standard GsStandard :
adsl2Plus
GsInitiate :- GsTxPowerAtten :-
GsCodingGain : Auto GsRsFastOvrhdDown :1
GsRsIntCorrectionDown : 1Ms GsRsFastOvrhdUp :1
GsDrStby : Disable GsExpandedExchange :
Expanded
GsEscapeFastRetrain : Disable GsFastRetrain : Disable
GsBitSwap : Enable GsNtr :
LocalOcs
GsAnnexType : adsl2 GsAlctlUsVer :
Unknown
GsUseCustomBin : Disable GsFullRetrain : Enable
GsPsdMaskType :- DmtConfMode :
fdmMode
GsExtRsMemory : notpresent ParamHybridLossTestStart: 0x2
GsParamHybridLossTestEnd: 0x40 GsDmtTrellis : on
GsAdvertisedCapabilities: AnnexA
GslTriggerMode : Disable
Type : interleavedOnly
GsDnBinUsage :
0xFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
FFFFFFFFFFFF
ParametricTestInputFile : -
Data Boost : Enable Upstream PSD :
Standard
Conf PM Mode : pmstatel3enable pmstatel2enable

202
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM
Conf PML0 Time(sec) : 180
Conf PML2 Time(sec) : 180 Conf PML2 ATPR (dB/10) : 30
Conf PML2 Rate(bps) : 0x10000
Conf GsREADSL2 Enable : disable

ADSL ATUR Configuration :

---------------------------
Target Snr Margin(dB/10): 60 Dnshift SnrMargin(dB/10): 0
Upshift SnrMargin(dB/10): 120 Min Upshift Time(sec) :0
Min Dnshift Time(sec) : 0 Fast Min Tx Rate(bps) : 0x7d00
Intl Min Tx Rate(bps) : 0x7d00 Fast Max Tx Rate(bps) : 0x109a00
Intl Max Tx Rate(bps) : 0x7d000 Max Intl Delay(ms) : 16

$modify adsl line intf enable ifname dsl-11

(Set ADSL port 12 enable)

IfName : dsl-11
Line Type : interleavedOnly Coding Type : dmt
GsUtopia L2TxAddr : 26 GsUtopia L2RxAddr : 26
Gs Clock Type : oscillator Gs Action : startup
Admin Status : Down Oper Status : Down
Trans Atuc Cap : ansit1413 q9921PotsNonOverlapped
q9921PotsOverlapped q9921IsdnNonOverlapped
q9921isdnOverlapped
q9922potsOverlapped
q9922Adsl2PlusPotsNonOverlappedq9922Ads
l2PlusPotsOverlapped q9922Adsl2PotsNonOverlapped
Trans Atuc Actual : -
GsDmtTrellis : trellisOn
Trans Atur Cap :-
PM Conf PMSF : idleop
Line DELT Conf LDSF : inhibit

Set Done

IfName : dsl-11
Line Type : interleavedOnly Coding Type : dmt
GsUtopia L2TxAddr : 26 GsUtopia L2RxAddr : 26
Gs Clock Type : oscillator Gs Action : startup
Admin Status : Up Oper Status : Down
Trans Atuc Cap : ansit1413 q9921PotsNonOverlapped
q9921PotsOverlapped q9921IsdnNonOverlapped
q9921isdnOverlapped
q9922potsOverlapped
q9922Adsl2PlusPotsNonOverlappedq9922Ads
l2PlusPotsOverlapped q9922Adsl2PotsNonOverlapped
Trans Atuc Actual : -
GsDmtTrellis : trellisOn
Trans Atur Cap :-
PM Conf PMSF : idleop
Line DELT Conf LDSF : inhibit

203
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM

6.7 Enable SNMP function

//SNMP function
// Step 1 : Create SNMP community
// Setp 2 : Create SNMP host
// Setp 3 : Create SNMP traphost

$create snmp comm community public rw

Entry Created

Community Access
-------------------------
public RW
:
$
$create snmp host ip 192.168.100.55 community public

Entry Created

Host Address Community

-----------------------------------
192.168.100.55 public
$
$

$create snmp traphost ip 192.168.100.55 community public

Entry Created

Ip Address : 192.168.100.55
Community : public
Port : 162 Version : v2c

6.8 LACP aggr

// Step 1：Create Ethernet and Bridge port

// Step 2：Create Aggregator interface
// Step 3：Create LACP Aggregator

$ create ethernet intf ifname eth-0

Entry Created

Interface : eth-0
Type : Uplink UseDhcp : False
IP Address : 0.0.0.0 Mask : 0.0.0.0
Pkt Type : ALL
Orl(mbps) : 300

204
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM
Configured Duplex : Auto Duplex : None
Configured Speed : Auto
Class0thrshld : 100 Class1thrshld: 100
Class2thrshld : 100 Class3thrshld: 100
Class4thrshld : 100 Class5thrshld: 100
Class6thrshld : 100 Class7thrshld: 100
ProfileName : SPPROFILE
Mgmt VLAN Index :-
Tagged Mgmt PDU Prio: -
Speed :-
Operational Status : Down Admin Status : Up
$
Thu Jan 01 00:02:33 1970 : STATUS ALARM : ETHER Interface Up : Interface - eth-0

$ create ethernet intf ifname eth-1

Entry Created

Interface : eth-1
Type : Uplink UseDhcp : False
IP Address : 0.0.0.0 Mask : 0.0.0.0
Pkt Type : ALL
Orl(mbps) : 300
Configured Duplex : Auto Duplex : None
Configured Speed : Auto
Class0thrshld : 100 Class1thrshld: 100
Class2thrshld : 100 Class3thrshld: 100
Class4thrshld : 100 Class5thrshld: 100
Class6thrshld : 100 Class7thrshld: 100
ProfileName : SPPROFILE
Mgmt VLAN Index :-
Tagged Mgmt PDU Prio: -
Speed :-
Operational Status : Down Admin Status : Up
$modify bridge mode enable
Bridging Mode is Enabled

Set Done

Bridging Mode is Enabled

$ create aggr intf ifname aggr-0 ip 192.168.100.111 mask 255.255.255.0 enable

Entry Created

Interface Index : aggr-0

IP Address : 192.168.100.111 Mask : 255.255.255.0
UseDhcp : False
Mgmt VLAN Index :-
Tagged Mgmt PDU Prio :0

205
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM
Admin Status : Up
Operational Status : Up
$create bridge port intf portid 385 ifname aggr-0 status enable

Entry Created

Port Id : 385 IfName : aggr-0

Max Unicast Addresses : 256 Learning Status : Enable
Port Oper Status : Enable Port Admin Status: Enable
Sticky Status : Disable FDB Modify : Enable
Acl Global Deny Apply : Disable
Acl Global Track Apply: Disable
Sensed IfIndex :-

$ create lacp aggr aggrifname aggr-0 aggrtype static

Entry Created

Aggr IfName : aggr-0

Mac Address : FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF Aggregate : True
Actor Sys Priority: 10 Partner Sys Priority: 0
Actor Sys ID : 00:01:EB:08:05:B9 Partner Sys ID : FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF
Actor Oper Key :- Partner Oper Key :-
Actor Admin Key : - Collector Max Delay : 0
Aggregation Type : Static

$ modify lacp aggrport info ifname eth-0 aggrstatus enable

Interface : eth-0 Port Is Aggregate :

-
Actor Oper Key :- Partner Oper
Key :-
Actor Admin Key :- Partner Admin
Key :-
Actor Port Priority :- Partner Admin Port Priority : -
Actor System Priority :- Partner Oper Port Priority : -
Actor System ID :- Partner Admin Sys Priority : -
Actor Port :- Partner Oper Sys Priority : -
Partner Admin Sys Id :- Partner Admin Port :-
Partner Oper Sys Id :- Partner Oper Port :-
Port Actor Admin State : -
Port Partner Admin State : -
Port Actor Oper State :-
Port Partner Oper State : -
Attached Agg ID :- Selected Agg
ID :-
Aggregation Status : Disable

Set Done

206
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM
Interface : eth-0 Port Is Aggregate :
True
Actor Oper Key : 20 Partner Oper
Key : 1000
Actor Admin Key :- Partner Admin
Key : 1000
Actor Port Priority : 10 Partner Admin Port Priority : 9
Actor System Priority : 10 Partner Oper Port Priority : 10
Actor System ID : 00:01:EB:08:05:B9 Partner Admin Sys Priority : 9
Actor Port :1 Partner Oper Sys Priority : 9
Partner Admin Sys Id : 01:02:03:04:05:06 Partner Admin Port :1
Partner Oper Sys Id : 01:02:03:04:05:06 Partner Oper Port :1
Port Actor Admin State : activity timeout aggr defaulted
Port Partner Admin State : timeout aggr defaulted
Port Actor Oper State : activity timeout aggr defaulted
Port Partner Oper State : timeout aggr defaulted
Attached Agg ID :- Selected Agg
ID :-
Aggregation Status : Enable

$ modify lacp aggrport info ifname eth-1 aggrstatus enable

Interface : eth-1 Port Is Aggregate :

-
Actor Oper Key :- Partner Oper
Key :-
Actor Admin Key :- Partner Admin
Key :-
Actor Port Priority :- Partner Admin Port Priority : -
Actor System Priority :- Partner Oper Port Priority : -
Actor System ID :- Partner Admin Sys Priority : -
Actor Port :- Partner Oper Sys Priority : -
Partner Admin Sys Id :- Partner Admin Port :-
Partner Oper Sys Id :- Partner Oper Port :-
Port Actor Admin State : -
Port Partner Admin State : -
Port Actor Oper State :-
Port Partner Oper State : -
Attached Agg ID :- Selected Agg
ID :-
Aggregation Status : Disable

Set Done

Interface : eth-1 Port Is Aggregate :

True
Actor Oper Key :- Partner Oper
Key :-
Actor Admin Key :- Partner Admin
Key : 1000
Actor Port Priority : 10 Partner Admin Port Priority : 9
Actor System Priority : 10 Partner Oper Port Priority : 0

207
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM
Actor System ID : 00:01:EB:08:05:B9 Partner Admin Sys Priority : 9
Actor Port :2 Partner Oper Sys Priority : 0
Partner Admin Sys Id : 01:02:03:04:05:06 Partner Admin Port :1
Partner Oper Sys Id : FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF Partner Oper Port :0
Port Actor Admin State : activity timeout aggr defaulted
Port Partner Admin State : timeout aggr defaulted
Port Actor Oper State : activity timeout aggr defaulted
Port Partner Oper State : timeout aggr defaulted
Attached Agg ID :- Selected Agg
ID : -Aggregation Status : Enable

6.9 Multicast
// Step 1：Create static multicast group

$CREATE BRIDGE STATIC MCAST VLANID 3 EGRESSPORTS 1 3 5 385

FORBIDEGRESSPORTS 48 MCASTADDR 01
:00:5E:01:01:04

ENTRY CREATED

VLAN INDEX :3 MCAST ADDRESS : 01:00:5E:01:01:04

EGRESS PORTS : 1 3 5 385
FORBIDDEN EGRESS PORTS : 48

$CREATE BRIDGE STATIC MCAST VLANID 5 EGRESSPORTS 2 4 6 385

FORBIDEGRESSPORTS 48 MCASTADDR 01
:00:5E:01:01:05

ENTRY CREATED

VLAN INDEX :5 MCAST ADDRESS : 01:00:5E:01:01:05

EGRESS PORTS : 2 4 6 385
FORBIDDEN EGRESS PORTS : 48
$

6.10 ACL
// Step 1 : create ACL global
// Step 2 : create ACL port

"Global ACL filter"

// deny the access

$CREATE ACL GLOBAL MACENTRY MACADDR 00:01:EB:00:23:23 DENY ENABLE TRACK

ENABLE

208
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM

ENTRY CREATED

MAC ADDRESS : 00:01:EB:00:23:23

DENY : ENABLE TRACK : ENABLE
NUMBER OF TIMES PORT CHANGED : 0
$

"Port ACL filter"

//allow the access

$CREATE ACL PORT MACENTRY PORTID 1 MACADDR 00:01:23:23:23:34

ENTRY CREATED

PORTID : 1
MAC ADDRESS : 00:01:23:23:23:34
$

$CREATE ACL PORT MACENTRY PORTID 2 MACADDR 00:01:32:23:35:43

ENTRY CREATED

PORTID : 2
MAC ADDRESS : 00:01:32:23:35:43

6.11 IP Filter
// Step 1 : create the filer rule for IP filter
//Step 2 : create the subrule
//Step 3 : enable the rule
//Step 4 : create the port to map this filter
//Step 5 : create the IP you want to filter

$CREATE FILTER RULE ENTRY RULEID 2 ACTION DROP RULEDIR IN

ENTRY CREATED

RULE ID : 2 RULE ACTION : DROP

SET PRIORITY : - ADMIN STATUS : DISABLE
STATS ADMIN STATUS : DISABLE RULE PRIORITY : HIGH
RULE DIRECTION : IN APPLYWHENREQ : DISABLE
PKT TYPE : UCAST
APPLICATION DESCRIPTION : -
SNOOP LEVEL : INTERFACE
$

209
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM

$CREATE FILTER SUBRULE IP RULEID 2 SUBRULEID 1 SRCADDRCMP NOTINGENLIST

ENTRY CREATED

RULE ID : 2 SUBRULE ID : 1
START SRC IP ADDR : - END SRC IP ADDR : -
START DEST IP ADDR : - END DEST IP ADDR : -
START IP PROT TYPE : - END IP PROT TYPE : -
IP SRC ADDR MASK : 0XFFFFFFFF IP DEST ADDR MASK : -
SRC IP ADDR COMP : NOT IN GEN LIST DEST IP ADDR COMP : ANY
SUBRULE PRIORITY : ASINRULE IP PROT TYPE COMP : ANY
TRANSPORT HEADER : ETHERNET
$

$CREATE FILTER RULE MAP IFNAME EOA-0 STAGEID 1 RULEID 2

ENTRY CREATED

INTERFACE : EOA-0 STAGE ID : 1

RULE ID : 2 ORDER ID : 2
$

$CREATE FILTER RULE MAP IFNAME EOA-1 STAGEID 1 RULEID 2

ENTRY CREATED

INTERFACE : EOA-1 STAGE ID : 1

RULE ID : 2 ORDER ID : 2

$MODIFY FILTER RULE ENTRY RULEID 2 STATUS ENABLE

RULE ID : 2 RULE ACTION : DROP

SET PRIORITY : - ADMIN STATUS : DISABLE
STATS ADMIN STATUS : DISABLE RULE PRIORITY : HIGH
RULE DIRECTION : IN APPLYWHENREQ : DISABLE
PKT TYPE : UCAST
APPLICATION DESCRIPTION : -
SNOOP LEVEL : INTERFACE

SET DONE

RULE ID : 2 RULE ACTION : DROP

210
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM
SET PRIORITY : - ADMIN STATUS : ENABLE
STATS ADMIN STATUS : DISABLE RULE PRIORITY : HIGH
RULE DIRECTION : IN APPLYWHENREQ : DISABLE
PKT TYPE : UCAST
APPLICATION DESCRIPTION : -
SNOOP LEVEL : INTERFACE
$

$CREATE CLFR LIST GENENTRY IFNAME EOA-0 VALUE 0XC0A864C8

//192.168.100.200

ENTRY CREATED

IF NAME : EOA-0
VALUE : 0XC0A864C8
VALUE TYPE : U32
$

$CREATE CLFR LIST GENENTRY IFNAME EOA-0 VALUE 0XC0A864CA

//192.168.100.202

ENTRY CREATED

IF NAME : EOA-0
VALUE : 0XC0A864CA
VALUE TYPE : U32
$

6.12 DHCP filter

//Step 1 : create the filter rule for DHCP filter
//Step 2 : create the subrule
//Step 3 : enable the rule
//Step 4 : create the port to map this filter

$create filter rule entry ruleid 3 action drop ruledir in

Entry Created

Rule Id :3 Rule Action : drop

Set Priority :- Admin status : disable

211
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM
Stats admin status : disable Rule Priority : High
Rule Direction : IN ApplyWhenReq : disable
Pkt Type : Ucast
Application Description : -
Snoop Level : interface
$
$
$create filter subrule udp ruleid 3 subruleid 1 dstportfrom 67 dstportto 69
srcportcmp any d
stportcmp inrange subruleprio high

Entry Created

Rule Id :3 Subrule Id :1
Start source port :- End source port :-
Start destination port : 67 End destination port : 69
Source port comparison : Any Destination port comparison : InRange
Subrule Priority : high
Transport Header : Ethernet

$modify filter rule entry ruleid 3 status enable

Rule Id :3 Rule Action : drop

Set Priority :- Admin status : disable
Stats admin status : disable Rule Priority : High
Rule Direction : IN ApplyWhenReq : disable
Pkt Type : Ucast
Application Description : -
Snoop Level : interface

Set Done

Rule Id :3 Rule Action : drop

Set Priority :- Admin status : enable
Stats admin status : disable Rule Priority : High
Rule Direction : IN ApplyWhenReq : disable
Pkt Type : Ucast
Application Description : -
Snoop Level : interface
$
$create filter rule map ifname eoa-0 stageid 1 ruleid 3

Entry Created

Interface : eoa-0 Stage Id : 1

Rule Id :3 Order Id : 3
$
$
$create filter rule map ifname eth-0 stageid 1 ruleid 3

Entry Created

Interface : eth-0 Stage Id : 1

Rule Id :3 Order Id : 3
$

212
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM

6.13 FTP filter

//Step 1 : create the filter rule for FTP filter
//Step 2 : create the subrule
//Step 3 : enable the rule
//Step 4 : create the port to map this filter

$CREATE FILTER RULE ENTRY RULEID 4 ACTION DROP RULEDIR IN

ENTRY CREATED

RULE ID : 4 RULE ACTION : DROP

SET PRIORITY : - ADMIN STATUS : DISABLE
STATS ADMIN STATUS : DISABLE RULE PRIORITY : HIGH
RULE DIRECTION : IN APPLYWHENREQ : DISABLE
PKT TYPE : UCAST
APPLICATION DESCRIPTION : -
SNOOP LEVEL : INTERFACE
$

$CREATE FILTER SUBRULE TCP RULEID 4 SUBRULEID 1 DSTPORTFROM 21 DSTPORTTO

23 SRCP ORTCMP ANY DSTPORTCMP INRANGE SUBRULEPRIO HIGH

ENTRY CREATED

RULE ID : 4 SUBRULE ID : 1
START SOURCE PORT : - END SOURCE PORT : -
START DESTINATION PORT : 21 END DESTINATION PORT : 23
SOURCE PORT COMPARISON : ANY DESTINATION PORT COMPARISON :
INRANGE
SUBRULE PRIORITY : HIGH
TRANSPORT HEADER : ETHERNET
$

$MODIFY FILTER RULE ENTRY RULEID 4 STATUS ENABLE

RULE ID : 4 RULE ACTION : DROP

SET PRIORITY : - ADMIN STATUS : DISABLE
STATS ADMIN STATUS : DISABLE RULE PRIORITY : HIGH
RULE DIRECTION : IN APPLYWHENREQ : DISABLE
PKT TYPE : UCAST
APPLICATION DESCRIPTION : -
SNOOP LEVEL : INTERFACE

SET DONE

RULE ID : 4 RULE ACTION : DROP

SET PRIORITY : - ADMIN STATUS : ENABLE
STATS ADMIN STATUS : DISABLE RULE PRIORITY : HIGH
RULE DIRECTION : IN APPLYWHENREQ : DISABLE

213
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM
PKT TYPE : UCAST
APPLICATION DESCRIPTION : -
SNOOP LEVEL : INTERFACE
$

$CREATE FILTER RULE MAP IFNAME EOA-0 STAGEID 1 RULEID 4

ENTRY CREATED

INTERFACE : EOA-0 STAGE ID : 1

RULE ID : 4 ORDER ID : 4
$

$CREATE FILTER RULE MAP IFNAME EOA-0 STAGEID 1 RULEID 4

ENTRY CREATED
INTERFACE : EOA-1 STAGE ID : 1
RULE ID : 4 ORDER ID : 4

6.14 HTTP filter

//Step 1 : create the filter rule for HTTP filter
//Step 2 : create the subrule
//Step 3 : enable the rule
//Step 4 : create the port to map this filter

$CREATE FILTER RULE ENTRY RULEID 5 ACTION DROP RULEDIR IN

$

ENTRY CREATED

RULE ID : 5 RULE ACTION : DROP

SET PRIORITY : - ADMIN STATUS : DISABLE
STATS ADMIN STATUS : DISABLE RULE PRIORITY : HIGH
RULE DIRECTION : IN APPLYWHENREQ : DISABLE
PKT TYPE : UCAST
APPLICATION DESCRIPTION : -
SNOOP LEVEL : INTERFACE
$

$CREATE FILTER SUBRULE TCP RULEID 5 SUBRULEID 1 DSTPORTFROM 80

SRCPORTCMP ANY DS TPORTCMP INRANGE SUBRULEPRIO HIGH

ENTRY CREATED

214
 IPAM-4800/4824 IP DSLAM
RULE ID : 5 SUBRULE ID : 1
START SOURCE PORT : - END SOURCE PORT : -
START DESTINATION PORT : 80 END DESTINATION PORT : 65535
SOURCE PORT COMPARISON : ANY DESTINATION PORT COMPARISON :
INRANGE
SUBRULE PRIORITY : HIGH
TRANSPORT HEADER : ETHERNET
$

$MODIFY FILTER RULE ENTRY RULEID 5 STATUS ENABLE

RULE ID : 5 RULE ACTION : DROP

SET PRIORITY : - ADMIN STATUS : DISABLE
STATS ADMIN STATUS : DISABLE RULE PRIORITY : HIGH
RULE DIRECTION : IN APPLYWHENREQ : DISABLE
PKT TYPE : UCAST
APPLICATION DESCRIPTION : -
SNOOP LEVEL : INTERFACE

SET DONE

RULE ID : 5 RULE ACTION : DROP

SET PRIORITY : - ADMIN STATUS : ENABLE
STATS ADMIN STATUS : DISABLE RULE PRIORITY : HIGH
RULE DIRECTION : IN APPLYWHENREQ : DISABLE
PKT TYPE : UCAST
APPLICATION DESCRIPTION : -
SNOOP LEVEL : INTERFACE
$

$CREATE FILTER RULE MAP IFNAME EOA-0 STAGEID 1 RULEID 5

ENTRY CREATED

INTERFACE : EOA-0 STAGE ID : 1

RULE ID : 5 ORDER ID : 5

215
 Appendix-A: Pin Assignment

CID Pin Assignment

The CID port is configured as DCE. The connection for such link is given
below:

Table A-1 IPAM-4800/4824 CID port pin assignment

Pin no. Usage

1 ----------
2 TD
3 RD
4 ----------
5 ----------
6 ----------
7 ----------
8 CTS
9 ----------
Note: Connector type is DB9 male

Table A-2 RS-232 DB9 pin assignment (for PC to CID port connection)
DB9 female DB9 male

IPAM-4800 2 2 PC
3 3
5 5

Table A-3 IPAM-4800/4824 management port pin assignment

Pin no. Usage

1 RX+
2 RX-
3 TX+
4 ---------
5 ---------
6 TX-
7 ---------
8 ----------
Note: Connector type is RJ-45

216
 Table A-4 Uplink and downlink port (Xn) pin assignment

Pin no. Usage

1 RX+
2 RX-
3 TX+
4 ---------
5 ---------
6 TX-
7 ---------
8 ----------
Note: (1) Ports are straight.
(2) Connector type is RJ 45.
Transceiver connector pin assignment
Table A-5 24 ports ADSL LINE Connector pin assignment
PIN # usage PIN# usage
1 ADSL loop#24-T 26 ADSL loop#24-R
2 ADSL loop#23-T 27 ADSL loop#23-R
3 ADSL loop#22-T 28 ADSL loop#22-R
4 ADSL loop#21-T 29 ADSL loop#21-R
5 ADSL loop#20-T 30 ADSL loop#20-R
6 ADSL loop#19-T 31 ADSL loop#19-R
7 ADSL loop#18-T 32 ADSL loop#18-R
8 ADSL loop#17-T 33 ADSL loop#17-R
9 ADSL loop#16-T 34 ADSL loop#16-R
10 ADSL loop#15-T 35 ADSL loop#15-R
11 ADSL loop#14-T 36 ADSL loop#14-R
12 ADSL loop#13-T 37 ADSL loop#13-R
13 ADSL loop#12-T 38 ADSL loop#12-R
14 ADSL loop#11-T 39 ADSL loop#11-R
15 ADSL loop#10-T 40 ADSL loop#10-R
16 ADSL loop#9-T 41 ADSL loop#9-R
17 ADSL loop#8-T 42 ADSL loop#8-R
18 ADSL loop#7-T 43 ADSL loop#7-R
19 ADSL loop#6-T 44 ADSL loop#6-R
20 ADSL loop#5-T 45 ADSL loop#5-R
21 ADSL loop#4-T 46 ADSL loop#4-R
22 ADSL loop#3-T 47 ADSL loop#3-R
23 ADSL loop#2-T 48 ADSL loop#2-R
24 ADSL loop#1-T 49 ADSL loop#1-R
25 NOT USED 50 NOT USED

Note: Connector type is 50 pin teleco-champ female

217
 Table A-6 24 ports POTS splitter PHONE Connector pin assignment
PIN # usage PIN# usage
1 PHONE#24-T 26 PHONE#24-R
2 PHONE#23-T 27 PHONE#23-R
3 PHONE#22-T 28 PHONE#22-R
4 PHONE#21-T 29 PHONE#21-R
5 PHONE#20-T 30 PHONE#20-R
6 PHONE#19-T 31 PHONE#19-R
7 PHONE#18-T 32 PHONE#18-R
8 PHONE#17-T 33 PHONE#17-R
9 PHONE#16-T 34 PHONE#16-R
10 PHONE#15-T 35 PHONE#15-R
11 PHONE#14-T 36 PHONE#14-R
12 PHONE#13-T 37 PHONE#13-R
13 PHONE#12-T 38 PHONE#12-R
14 PHONE#11-T 39 PHONE#11-R
15 PHONE#10-T 40 PHONE#10-R
16 PHONE#9-T 41 PHONE#9-R
17 PHONE#8-T 42 PHONE#8-R
18 PHONE#7-T 43 PHONE#7-R
19 PHONE#6-T 44 PHONE#6-R
20 PHONE#5-T 45 PHONE#5-R
21 PHONE#4-T 46 PHONE#4-R
22 PHONE#3-T 47 PHONE#3-R
23 PHONE#2-T 48 PHONE#2-R
24 PHONE#1-T 49 PHONE#1-R
25 NOT USED 50 NOT USED

Note: Connector type is 50 pin teleco-champ female

218